Supra Owner’s Manual
2
Supra Owner's Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-1. NOTES
Information .............................. 4
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Entering.................................16
Set-up and use......................22
In transit ................................27
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ..................................36
Idle state, standby state, and
drive-ready state .................40
Toyota Supra Command .......43
Voice activation system.........55
General settings....................58
Personal settings ..................62
Connections ..........................67
Owner's Manual media .........76
4-1. CONTROLS
Opening and closing .............78
Seats, mirrors, and steering
wheel...................................96
Transporting children safely
......................................... 109
Driving................................ 115
Displays ............................. 132
Lights ................................. 152
Safety................................. 159
Driving stability control systems
......................................... 195
Driver assistance systems . 200
Driving comfort................... 227
Climate control ................... 228
Interior equipment .............. 236
Storage compartments....... 242
Cargo area ......................... 244
5-1. DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driv-
ing .................................... 250
Saving fuel ......................... 255
6-1. MOBILITY
Refueling............................ 260
Wheels and tires ................ 262
Engine compartment.......... 288
Operating materials............ 291
Maintenance ...................... 299
Replacing components ...... 302
Breakdown assistance ....... 310
Care ................................... 319
7-1. REFERENCE
Technical data .................... 328
Certification ........................ 331
Alphabetical Index.............. 342
1
NOTES
2
QUICK REFERENCE
3
AT A GLANCE
4
CONTROLS
5
DRIVING TIPS
6
MOBILITY
7
REFERENCE
Index
3
Supra Owner's Manual
1
1
NOTES
NOTES
.
1-1. NOTES
Information ....................... 4
4
1-1. NOTES
Supra Owner's Manual
1-1.NOTE S
The fastest way to find informa-
tion on a particular topic is by
using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle
is provided in the first chapter.
Your Toyota dealer will be glad
to answer questions at any time.
Action steps to be carried out
are presented as numbered list.
The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
1 First action step.
2 Second action step.
Enumerations without manda-
tory order or alternative possibil-
ities are presented as list with
bullet points.
• First possibility.
• Second possibility.
This symbol on a vehicle
component indicates that further
information on the component is
available in the Owner's Manual.
Information
Using this Owner's Man-
ual
Orientation
Additional sources of
information
Your Toyota dealer
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's
Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must
be followed in order to
avoid the possibility of
injury to yourself and to
others as well as seri-
ous damage to the
vehicle.
Measures that can be
taken to help protect
the environment.
"..."
Texts in vehicle used to
select Customize func-
tions.
›...‹
Verbal instructions to
use with the voice acti-
vation system.
››...‹‹
Responses generated
by the voice activation
system.
Action steps
Enumerations
Symbols on vehicle com-
ponents
Symbol Meaning
5
1-1. NOTES
Supra Owner's Manual
1
NOTES
This Owner's Manual describes
all models and all standard,
country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the
model series. Therefore, this
Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and
functions that are not available
in a vehicle, for example
because of the selected optional
features or the country-specific
version.
This also applies to
safety-related functions and sys-
tems.
When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be
observed.
For any options and equipment
not described in this Owner's
Manual, refer to the Supplemen-
tary Owner's Manuals.
Toyota is happy to answer any
questions that you may have
about the features and options
applicable to your vehicle.
The manufacturer of your vehi-
cle pursues a policy of constant
development that is conceived
to ensure that our vehicles con-
tinue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards. In
rare cases, therefore, the fea-
tures described in this Owner's
Manual may differ from those in
your vehicle.
Follow the following when using
the vehicle:
• Owner's Manual.
• Information on the vehicle. Do
not remove stickers.
• Technical vehicle data.
• The traffic, speed, and safety
laws where the vehicle is
driven.
• Vehicle documents and statu-
tory documents.
Your vehicle is technically con-
figured for the operating condi-
tions and registration
requirements applying in the
country of first delivery, also
known as homologation. If your
vehicle is to be operated in a dif-
ferent country it might be neces-
sary to adapt your vehicle to
potentially differing operating
conditions and registration
requirements. If your vehicle
does not comply with the
Vehicle features and
options
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Warranty
6
1-1. NOTES
Supra Owner's Manual
homologation requirements in a
certain country you may not be
able to lodge warranty claims for
your vehicle there. Further infor-
mation on warranty is available
from your Toyota dealer.
Advanced technology, e. g. the
use of modern materials and
high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance
and repair work.
If work is performed improperly,
for instance maintenance and
repair, there is a risk of subse-
quent damage and related
safety risks.
Improperly performed work on
the vehicle paint can lead to a
failure or malfunction of compo-
nents, e.g., the radar sensors,
and thereby result in a safety
risk.
Toyota recommends the use of
parts and accessory products
approved by Toyota.
Approved parts and accesso-
ries, and advice on their use and
installation are available from
To y o ta .
Toyota parts and accessories
have been tested by Toyota for
their safety and suitability in
Toyota vehicles.
Toyota warrants genuine Toyota
parts and accessories.
Toyota does not evaluate
whether each Customize prod-
uct from another manufacturer
can be used with Toyota vehi-
cles without presenting a safety
hazard, even if a country-spe-
cific official approval was issued.
Toyota does not evaluate
whether these products are suit-
able for Toyota vehicles under
all usage conditions.
California law requires vehicle
manufacturers provide the fol-
lowing warning:
Maintenance and repairs
Parts and accessories
California Proposition 65
Warning
7
1-1. NOTES
Supra Owner's Manual
1
NOTES
We recommend that you read
this publication thoroughly.
Detailed information about war-
ranty is listed in the "Owner's
Warranty Information Booklet"
or "Owner's Manual Supple-
ment".
Your vehicle has been specifi-
cally adapted and designed to
meet the particular operating
conditions and homologation
requirements in your country
and continental region in order
to deliver the full driving plea-
sure while the vehicle is oper-
ated under those conditions. If
you wish to operate your vehicle
in another country or region, you
may be required to adapt your
vehicle to meet different prevail-
ing operating conditions and
homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any
applicable warranty limitations
or exclusions for such country or
region. In such case, please
contact your Toyota dealer for
further information.
Maintain the vehicle regularly to
sustain the road safety, opera-
tional reliability and the war-
ranty.
Specifications for required main-
tenance measures:
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of Automobile components
and parts, including components
found in the interior furnishings in
a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-
cals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained
in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm. Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds. Batter-
ies also contain other chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer. Wash your hands
after handling. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory ani-
mals. Always protect your skin by
washing thoroughly with soap and
water. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/pas-
senger-vehicle.
WARNING
Operating, servicing and main-
taining a passenger vehicle or
off-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals includ-
ing engine exhaust, carbon mon-
oxide, phthalates, and lead, which
are known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not
idle the engine except as neces-
sary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands fre-
quently when servicing your vehi-
cle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/pas-
senger-vehicle.
Service and warranty
Maintenance
8
1-1. NOTES
Supra Owner's Manual
Maintenance system.
"Owner's Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet" or "Owner's
Manual Supplement".
If the vehicle is not maintained
according to these specifica-
tions, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such
damage is not covered by the
warranty.
Electronic control devices are
installed in the vehicle. Elec-
tronic control units process data
they receive from vehicle sen-
sors, self-generate or exchange
with each other. Some control
units are necessary for the vehi-
cle to function safely or provide
assistance during driving, for
instance driver assistance sys-
tems. Furthermore, control
devices facilitate comfort or info-
tainment functions.
Information about stored or
exchanged data can be
requested from the manufac-
turer of the vehicle, in a sepa-
rate booklet, for example.
Each vehicle is marked with a
unique vehicle identification
number. Depending on the
country, the vehicle owner can
be identified with the vehicle
identification number, license
plate and corresponding authori-
ties. In addition, there are other
options to track data collected in
the vehicle to the driver or vehi-
cle owner, e.g. via the Toyota
Supra Connect account that is
used.
Control units process data to
operate the vehicle.
For example, this includes:
• Status messages for the vehi-
cle and its Customize compo-
nents, e.g., wheel rotational
speed, wheel speed, deceler-
ation, transverse acceleration,
engaged safety belt indicator.
• Ambient conditions, e.g., tem-
perature, rain sensor signals.
The processed data is only pro-
cessed in the vehicle itself and
generally volatile. The data is
not stored beyond the operating
period.
Electronic components, e.g.
control units and ignition keys,
contain components for storing
technical information. Informa-
tion about the vehicle condition,
component usage, mainte-
nance requirements or faults
can be stored temporarily or
permanently.
Data memory
General information
Personal reference
Operating data in the vehi-
cle
9
1-1. NOTES
Supra Owner's Manual
1
NOTES
This information generally
records the state of a compo-
nent, a module, a system, or the
environment, for instance:
• Operating states of system
components, e.g., fill levels,
tire inflation pressure, battery
status.
• Malfunctions and faults in
important system compo-
nents, for instance lights and
brakes.
• Responses by the vehicle to
special situations such as
airbag deployment or engage-
ment of the driving stability
control systems.
• Information on vehicle-dam-
aging events.
The data is required to perform
the control device functions.
Furthermore, it also serves to
recognize and correct malfunc-
tions, and helps the vehicle
manufacturer to optimize vehicle
functions.
The majority of this data is tran-
sient and is only processed
within the vehicle itself. Only a
small share of the data is stored
event-related in event or fault
memories.
When servicing, for instance
during repairs, service pro-
cesses, warranty cases, and
quality assurance measures,
this technical information can be
read out from the vehicle
together with the vehicle identifi-
cation number.
Your Toyota dealer can read out
the information. The socket for
OBD Onboard Diagnosis
required by law in the vehicle is
used to read out the data.
The data is collected, pro-
cessed, and used by the rele-
vant organizations in the service
network. The data documents
technical conditions of the vehi-
cle, helps with the identification
of the fault, compliance with
warranty obligations and quality
improvement.
Furthermore, the manufacturer
has product monitoring duties to
meet in line with product liability
law. To fulfill these duties, the
vehicle manufacturer needs
technical data from the vehicle.
The data from the vehicle can
also be used to check customer
claims for warranty and guar-
anty.
Fault and event memories in the
vehicle can be reset when your
Toyota dealer performs repair or
servicing work.
Depending on the vehicle equip-
ment, comfort and Customize
settings can be stored in the
vehicle and modified or reset at
Data entry and data trans-
fer into the vehicle
General information
10
1-1. NOTES
Supra Owner's Manual
any time.
For example, this includes:
• Setting for the seat position.
• Suspension and climate con-
trol settings.
If necessary, data can be trans-
ferred to the entertainment and
communication system of the
vehicle, e.g. via smartphone.
This includes the following
depending on the respective
equipment:
• Multimedia data such as
music, films or photos for
playback in an integrated mul-
timedia system.
• Address book data for use in
conjunction with an integrated
hands-free system or an inte-
grated navigation system.
• Entered navigation destina-
tions.
• Data on the use of Internet
services.
This data can be stored locally
in the vehicle or is found on a
device that has been connected
to the vehicle, e.g., a
smartphone, USB stick or MP3
player. If this data is stored in
the vehicle, it can be deleted at
any time.
This data is only transmitted to
third parties upon personal
request as part of the use of
online services. The transmis-
sion depends on the selected
settings for the use of the ser-
vices.
Depending on the vehicle equip-
ment, mobile devices connected
to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled
via the vehicle control elements.
The sound and picture from the
mobile device can be played
back and displayed through the
multimedia system. Certain
information is transferred to the
mobile device at the same time.
Depending on the type of incor-
poration, this includes, for
instance position data and other
general vehicle information. This
optimizes the way in which
selected apps, for instance navi-
gation or music playback, work.
There is no further interaction
between the mobile device and
the vehicle, for instance active
access to vehicle data.
How the data will be processed
further is determined by the pro-
vider of the particular app being
used. The extent of the possible
settings depends on the respec-
tive app and the operating sys-
tem of the mobile device.
If the vehicle has a wireless net-
work connection, this enables
Incorporation of mobile end
devices
Services
General information
11
1-1. NOTES
Supra Owner's Manual
1
NOTES
data to be exchanged between
the vehicle and other systems.
The wireless network connec-
tion is realized via an in-vehicle
transmitter and receiver unit or
via personal mobile devices
brought into the vehicle, for
instance smartphones. This
wireless network connection
enables 'online functions' to be
used. These include online ser-
vices and apps supplied by the
vehicle manufacturer or by other
providers.
Where online services from the
vehicle manufacturer are con-
cerned, the corresponding func-
tions are described in the
appropriate place, for instance
the Owner's Manual or manu-
facturer's website. The relevant
legal information pertaining to
data protection is provided there
too. Personal data may be used
to perform online services. Data
is exchanged over a secure con-
nection, for instance with the IT
systems of the vehicle manufac-
turer intended for this purpose.
Any collection, processing, and
use of personal data above and
beyond that needed to provide
the services must always be
based on a legal permission,
contractual arrangement or con-
sent. It is also possible to acti-
vate or deactivate the data
connection as a whole. That is,
with the exception of functions
and services required by law
such as Assist systems.
When using online services
from other providers, these ser-
vices are the responsibility of
the relevant provider and sub-
ject to their data privacy condi-
tions and terms of use. The
vehicle manufacturer has no
influence on the content
exchanged during this process.
Information on the way in which
personal data is collected and
used in relation to services from
third parties, the scope of such
data, and its purpose, can be
obtained from the relevant ser-
vice provider.
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder EDR. The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer
Services from other provid-
ers
Event Data Recorder EDR
12
1-1. NOTES
Supra Owner's Manual
period of time, typically 30 sec-
onds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data
as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating.
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
fastened.
• How far, if at all, the driver
was depressing the accelera-
tor and/or brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
This data can help provide a
better understanding of the cir-
cumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your
vehicle only if a nontrivial crash
situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under nor-
mal driving conditions and no
personal data, for instance
name, gender, age, and crash
location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data rou-
tinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an
EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufac-
turer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the spe-
cial equipment, can read the
information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
The vehicle identification num-
ber can be found in the engine
compartment, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
The vehicle identification num-
ber can also be found behind
the windshield.
Vehicle identification
number
Engine compartment
Windshield
13
1-1. NOTES
Supra Owner's Manual
1
NOTES
Other Precautions
WARNING
Do not modify the vehicle.
Do not modify the vehicle with any
parts (ex. batteries, electrical
components, etc.) other than
Toyota genuine parts and acces-
sories or Toyota approved parts,
as doing so may cause an unex-
pected malfunction or an acci-
dent. For information on Toyota
genuine parts and accessories,
contact a Toyota dealer.
WARNING
Do not install any accessories to
the windshield.
If an accessory is installed to the
windshield or the rear view mirror,
it may block your vision of the
road or become a distraction, pos-
sibly leading to an accident. Also,
if an object such as a suction cup
is attached to the windshield, it
may act as a lens and possibly
cause a fire. Do not install a wide
view mirror to the rear view mirror
as it may come loose in a collision
and cause injury.
WARNING
■
When the vehicle is parked
●
Do not leave glasses, cigarette
lighters, spray cans, or soft
drink cans in the vehicle when it
is in the sun. Doing so may
result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette
lighter or spray can, and may
lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the
vehicle may cause the plastic
lenses and plastic material of
glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture,
causing the contents to spray
over the interior of the vehicle,
and may also cause a short cir-
cuit in the vehicle’s electrical
components.
14
1-1. NOTES
Supra Owner's Manual
The following only applies to
vehicles owned and operated in
the US.
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investi-
gation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. How-
ever, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov ; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E.,
Washington, DC 20590. You
can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
Canadian customers who wish
to report a safety-related defect
to Transport Canada, Defect
Investigations and Recalls, may
call the toll-free customer sup-
port 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
WARNING
■
Items that should not be left
in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or
spray cans in the storage spaces,
as this may cause the following
when cabin temperature becomes
high:
●
Glasses may be deformed by
heat or cracked if they come
into contact with other stored
items.
●
Lighters or spray cans may
explode. If they come into con-
tact with other stored items, the
lighter may catch fire or the
spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
For Canadian customers
15
Supra Owner's Manual
2
2
QUICK REFERENCE
QUICK REFERENCE
.
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Entering.......................... 16
Set-up and use............... 22
In transit .........................27
16
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
2-1.QUICK REFERENCE
Before starting the engine, per-
form the necessary routine vehi-
cle checks. It is the owner’s
responsibility to perform routine
vehicle checks and any legally
necessary yearly inspections,
according to any local laws and
regulations. For details about
inspection procedures, refer to
the Service Book (Maintenance
Guide).
Entering
Before driving
Vehicle inspection
WARNING
Do not leave flammable objects in
the vehicle.
If a fuel can, combustible car care
products, spray cans, etc. are left
in the vehicle, there is a danger
that they may catch fire and
explode. Also, when the vehicle is
parked with the doors and win-
dows completely closed, do not
leave containers of carbonated
beverages in the vehicle, as the
temperature inside the vehicle
can increase to over 122°F,
depending on the location.
WARNING
Make sure to securely stow all
luggage.
In the case of sudden braking or a
collision, unsecured objects may
fly about and strike the occupants,
possibly causing injury. Make sure
to stow luggage securely in the
luggage compartment when pos-
sible.
WARNING
Do not leave objects on the
driver’s side floor.
17
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
2
QUICK REFERENCE
There are blind spots around
the vehicle which cannot be
seen from the driver’s seat.
Make sure to check the area
WARNING
If an object gets stuck behind the
brake pedal, braking may be
impossible and the accelerator
pedal may not return after being
depressed, leading to an
extremely dangerous situation.
WARNING
Make sure that the floor mats are
securely installed.
Make sure to only use genuine
Toyota floor mats which are
designed for this model and
secure them in place using the
provided fasteners. When the
floor mats have been removed,
such as when cleaning the vehi-
cle, make sure to securely install
the floor mats using the fasteners
before driving the vehicle.
If a floor mat which cannot be
installed securely, due to a dam-
aged fastener, etc., is used, it may
shift while driving and cover the
accelerator pedal, possibly
depressing it and causing an acci-
dent.
Additionally, never install two or
more floor mats on top of each
other. Not only will additional floor
mats interfere with normal opera-
tion of the pedals, but there is a
danger that a mat may curl behind
the brake pedal and prevent it
from being depressed.
WARNING
Be careful not to inhale exhaust
gases.
The exhaust includes colorless,
odorless carbon monoxide (CO).
Carbon monoxide (CO) can be
inhaled without noticing and in the
worst cases, can cause death.
Make sure to not allow the engine
to idle in a closed off garage or
other location with poor ventila-
tion.
If there is a hole or crack in the
exhaust system, caused by corro-
sion, etc., exhaust gasses may
enter the vehicle while driving. If
you smell exhaust gasses in the
vehicle, completely open all of the
windows and have the vehicle
inspected by Toyota dealer.
Confirm safety of
surroundings
18
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
around the vehicle for small
children and low objects
before driving.
When backing up (reversing),
if you cannot see the area
behind the vehicle suffi-
ciently, exit the vehicle and
check the area before pro-
ceeding.
Refrain from driving when you
are fatigued or not feeling well.
Also, if driving for a long time, be
sure to stop and rest periodi-
cally.
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the trunk lid
4 Press and hold or press three
times in quick succession:
panic mode
Press briefly: headlight cour-
tesy delay feature
Depending on the settings,
either only the driver's door or all
vehicle access points are
unlocked.
If only the driver's door is
unlocked, press the button on
the remote control again to
unlock the other vehicle access
points.
1 Close the driver's door.
2 Press the button on the
remote control.
All vehicle access points are
locked.
When in poor physical
condition
Opening and closing
Buttons on the remote
control
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the
remote control.
Locking the vehicle
19
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
2
QUICK REFERENCE
Buttons for the central locking
system.
The fuel filler flap remains
unlocked.
You can trigger the alarm sys-
tem if you find yourself in a dan-
gerous situation.
• Press the button on the
remote control and hold for at
least 3 seconds.
• Briefly press the button on the
remote control three times in
succession.
To switch off the alarm: press
any button.
The vehicle can be accessed
without activating the remote
control.
All you need to do is to have the
remote control with you, such as
in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically
detects the remote control when
it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle
door completely.
Buttons for the central
locking system
Overview
Locking
Pressing the button
locks the vehicle if the
front doors are closed.
Unlocking
Pressing the button
unlocks the vehicle.
Panic mode
Smart Key System
Concept
Unlocking the vehicle
20
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
Touch the grooved surface on
the handle of a closed vehicle
door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the
door handle.
Depending on the setting, the
doors may also be unlocked.
Closing the trunk lid manually.
1 Wipers
2 Instrument cluster
3 Turn signal indicator, high
beams
4 Light switch element
The indicator/warning lights can
light up in a variety of combina-
tions and colors.
Several lights indicate function
checks and light up only tempo-
rarily when standby state or
standby state are activated.
Locking the vehicle
Trunk lid
Opening
Press and hold the but-
ton on the remote con-
trol for approx. 1
second.
Closing
Displays and control ele-
ments
In the vicinity of the steer-
ing wheel
Indicator/warning lights
Instrument cluster
1
2
3
4
21
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
2
QUICK REFERENCE
1 Exterior mirrors
2 Power windows
3 Central locking system
4 Unlocking the trunk lid
1 Selector lever
2 Controller
3 Auto Start/Stop cancel button
4 Sport mode button
5 Park Assistant button
6 VSC OFF button
7 Toyota Supra Safety button
8 Parking brake
Toyota Supra Command
includes a large number of func-
tions. These functions can be
operated via controller and,
depending on the equipment
version, via touch screen or
voice activation system.
Driver's door
Switch console
3 2 1
4
Toyota Supra Command
Concept
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Opens the main menu.
Open the Communica-
tion menu.
Open the Media/Radio
menu.
Open destination input
menu for navigation.
Open navigation map.
Open the previous dis-
play.
Open the Options
menu.
22
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
■
Activating the voice activa-
tion system
1 Press the button on the
steering wheel.
2 Wait for the signal.
3 Say the command.
If no other commands are possi-
ble, operate the function via
Toyota Supra Command.
■
Terminating the voice acti-
vation system
1 Backrest angle
2 Height
3 Backrest width
4 Lumbar support
5 Forward/back
6 Seat angle
1 Forward/backward, height,
seat tilt
2 Driver's seat memory
3 Backrest tilt
Voice activation
The symbol on the
Control Display indi-
cates that voice activa-
tion system is active.
Press the button on the
steering wheel or ›Can-
cel‹.
Set-up and use
Seats, mirrors, and steer-
ing wheel
Manually adjustable seats
Electrically adjustable
seats
6 5 4 3 2 1
23
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
2
QUICK REFERENCE
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic
Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
1 Fold the lever down.
2 Move the steering wheel to
the preferred height and
angle to suit your seating
position.
3 Fold the lever back up.
The following settings can be
stored and, if necessary,
retrieved using the memory
function:
• Seat position.
• Exterior mirror position.
• Height of the Head-up Dis-
play.
1 Set the desired position.
2 Press button on the
driver's seat. The writing on
the button lights up.
3 Press selected button 1 or 2
at the driver's seat while the
writing is lit. A signal sounds.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
Adjusting the exterior mir-
rors
Adjusting the steering
wheel
Manual steering wheel
adjustment
Memory function
Concept
Storing
Calling up settings
24
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
1 Changing the entertainment
source
2 Sound output on/off, volume
3 Programmable memory but-
tons
4 Change station/track
5 Waveband/satellite radio
■
State/province
1 "Navigation"
2 "Enter address"
3 "State/Province?"
4 Move the Controller to the
right to select the state from
the list.
■
Entering the address
The address can be entered in
any order.
Example: entering the address
via the town/city
1 "City/Postal code?"
2 Enter the town/city.
The list is narrowed down further
with each entry.
3 Select the symbol.
4 Select a town/city from the
list.
5 If necessary, enter the street.
6 Select the street as you
would the town/city.
7 If necessary, enter a house
number.
8 Select the symbol.
9 Select a house number or
range of house numbers from
the list.
"Start guidance"
If only the town/city was
entered: destination guidance is
started to the town/city center.
After the mobile phone is con-
nected once to the vehicle, the
mobile phone can be operated
using Toyota Supra Command,
Infotainment
Radio
Navigation destination
entry
Entering a destination via
address
Starting destination guid-
ance
Connecting a mobile
phone
General information
25
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
2
QUICK REFERENCE
the steering wheel buttons and
voice activation.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 "Connect new device"
5 Select the functions for which
the mobile phone is to be
used.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle
is displayed on the Control Display.
6 To perform additional steps
on the mobile phone, refer to
the mobile phone owner's
manual: e.g., search for or
connect the Bluetooth device
or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle
appears on the mobile phone dis-
play. Select the Bluetooth name of
the vehicle.
7 Depending on the mobile
device, a control number is
displayed or the control num-
ber must be entered.
• Compare the control number
displayed on the Control Dis-
play with the control number
on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the
device and on the Control Display.
• Enter and confirm the same
control number on the device
and via Toyota Supra Com-
mand.
The device is connected and
displayed in the device list.
Incoming calls can be answered
in several ways.
• Via Toyota Supra Command:
"Accept"
• Press the button on the
steering wheel.
• Via the selection list in the
instrument cluster:
Use the thumbwheel on the steer-
ing wheel to select: "Accept"
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "Communication"
2 "Dial number"
3 Enter the numbers.
4 Select the symbol. The
connection is established via
the mobile phone to which
this function has been
assigned.
Establish the connection via the
additional phone:
1 Press the button.
2 "Call via"
Connecting the mobile
phone via Bluetooth
Using the phone
Accepting a call
Dialing a number
26
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
CarPlay allows certain func-
tions of a compatible Apple
iPhone to be used via Siri voice
operation and Toyota Supra
Command.
• Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or
later.
• Corresponding mobile wire-
less contract.
• Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice
operation are switched on on
the iPhone.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 "Settings"
5 Select the following setting:
• "Bluetooth®"
• Corresponding mobile wire-
less contract.
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with
the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the
vehicle and displayed in the
device list.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
Functional requirements
Switching on Bluetooth and
CarPlay
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
27
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
2
QUICK REFERENCE
1 Engage selector lever posi-
tion P with the vehicle
stopped.
2 Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
3 Set the parking brake.
The Auto Start/Stop function
switches the engine off automat-
ically while stationary to save
fuel. The engine starts automati-
cally under the following precon-
ditions:
• By releasing the brake pedal.
The LED and indicator light go
out.
The parking brake is released.
• Drive mode D.
• Neutral N.
• Reverse R.
With the driver's safety belt fas-
tened, briefly push the selector
In transit
Driving
Drive-ready state
Switching on drive-ready
state
• Depress the brake
pedal.
• Press the Start/Stop
button.
Switching off drive-ready
state
Auto Start/Stop function
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED and indicator
light up.
Releasing
With drive-ready state
switched on:
Press the switch while
the brake is pressed or
selector lever position
P is set.
Automatic transmission
Engaging selector lever
position D, N, R
28
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
lever in the desired direction,
past a resistance point, if
needed. The selector lever
returns to the center position in
each case.
To prevent the vehicle from
creeping after you select a drive
mode or reverse, maintain pres-
sure on the brake pedal until
you are ready to start.
A selector lever lock prevents
the inadvertent shifting to selec-
tor lever position R or the inad-
vertent shifting from selector
lever position P.
Engage selector lever position R
only when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Press the button.
Engage selector lever position P
only when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Press button P.
Activate the manual mode:
Press the selector lever to the
left out of selector lever position
D.
Manual mode:
• To shift down: press the
selector lever forward.
• To shift up: pull the selector
lever rearwards.
End the manual mode:
Push the selector lever to the
right.
Releasing the selector lever
lock
Engaging P
Automatic transmission,
manual mode
29
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
2
QUICK REFERENCE
Push the lever forward or pull it
backward.
• High beams on, arrow 1. The
high beams light up when the
low beams are switched on.
• High beams off/headlight
flasher, arrow 2.
• On: press the lever past the
resistance point.
• Off: press the lever past the
resistance point in the oppo-
site direction.
• Triple turn signal activation:
lightly tap the lever up or
down.
• Brief signaling: press the lever
to the resistance point and
hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to flash.
High beams, headlight
flasher, turn signal
High beams, headlight
flasher
Turn signal
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight
control.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking
light.
Left roadside parking
light.
30
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
■
Switching on
Press the lever up until the
desired position is reached.
• Resting position of the wipers:
position 0.
• Rain sensor: position 1.
• Normal wiper speed: position
2.
• Fast wiper speed: position 3.
■
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down.
• Switching off: press the lever
down until it reaches its stan-
dard position.
• Brief wipe: press the lever
down from the standard posi-
tion.
■
Activating/deactivating
To activate: press the lever up
once from its standard position,
arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever
back into the standard position.
■
Adjusting the sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel on the
wiper lever.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off
and brief wipe
Rain sensor
Cleaning the windshield
31
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
2
QUICK REFERENCE
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
1 Press the rear edge of the
fuel filler flap to open it.
2 Turn the fuel cap
counterclockwise.
3 Place the fuel cap in the
bracket attached to the fuel
filler flap.
For the best fuel efficiency, the
Climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Recirculated-air mode.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Air distribution, manual.
Switching off.
Defrost and defog the
windshield.
Rear window defroster.
Seat heating.
Climate control opera-
tion.
Air flow, manual.
Refueling
Refueling
Fuel cap
Gasoline
Button Function
32
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
gasoline should be sulfur-free or
very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the
gas pump as containing metal
must not be used. P.291
The tire inflation pressure speci-
fications can be found in the tire
inflation pressure table in the
printed Owner's Manual.
With Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM:
With tires that cannot be found
in the tire pressure values on
the Control Display, reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Regularly check the tire inflation
pressure and correct it as
needed:
• At least twice a month.
• Before embarking on an
extended trip.
The friction during hard braking
may produce brake dust and
make the rims dirty. Brake dust
can be removed by cleaning the
rims. Toyota recommends using
vehicle care and cleaning prod-
ucts from Toyota.
A current measured value is
available after approx. 30 min-
utes of normal driving.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle status"
3 "Engine oil level"
Different messages appear on
the Control Display depending
on the engine oil level. Pay
attention to these messages.
Safely park the vehicle and
switch off drive-ready state
before adding engine oil.
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure speci-
fications
After correcting the tire infla-
tion pressure
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
Cleaning the wheels
Electronic oil measure-
ment
Functional requirements
Displaying the engine oil
level
Adding engine oil
General information
33
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
2
QUICK REFERENCE
Only add engine oil when the
message is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Observe the quantity to be
added in the message.
Take care not to add too much
engine oil.
Observe recommended engine
oil types.
The button is located in the cen-
ter console.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "Toyota Supra Connect"
2 "Toyota Supra Assistance"
3 "Roadside assistance"
A voice connection is established.
The Concierge offers informa-
tion on events, gas stations or
hotels, and provides phone
numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly by
the Concierge.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "Toyota Supra Connect"
2 "Toyota Supra Assistance"
3 "Concierge"
A voice connection to the Con-
cierge is established.
Remote maintenance are ser-
vices that help to maintain vehi-
cle mobility.
Remote maintenance can com-
prise the following services:
• Roadside assistance.
• Battery guard.
When leaving the vehicle, turn
Adding
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers
Roadside assistance
Toyota Supra Connect
Concierge
Remote maintenance
After driving
When parking
34
2-1. QUICK REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
the engine switch off, apply the
parking brake and lock the
doors.
When parking, stop the vehicle
in a safe and appropriate park-
ing area, operate the “P” (park-
ing) switch on the selector lever
and turn the engine switch off.
WARNING
When taking a nap in the vehicle,
make sure to turn the engine
switch off.
When taking a nap in the vehicle
is unavoidable, park the vehicle in
a safe place, turn the engine
switch off, and if possible, sleep in
the passenger seat. If the engine
is left running, the accelerator
pedal may be depressed or selec-
tor lever may be operated unin-
tentionally, possibly leading to an
accident. Also, if the engine is run
at a high speed for a long time,
the exhaust system and engine
may become extremely hot, pos-
sibly causing to a fire.
WARNING
Be careful when parking, as to not
park the vehicle near flammable
materials.
Do not park the vehicle near flam-
mable materials, such as dry
grass, leaves, paper, oil, etc. If
these kinds of material touch a
part of the exhaust system, it may
cause a fire.
35
Supra Owner's Manual
3
3
AT A GLANCE
AT A GLANCE
.
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ........................... 36
Idle state, standby state,
and drive-ready state ...40
Toyota Supra Command
.....................................43
Voice activation system..55
General settings............. 58
Personal settings ........... 62
Connections ................... 67
Owner's Manual media ..76
36
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3-1.AT A GLANCE
This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional
features offered with the series. It also describes features and func-
tions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions
and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
1 Central locking system
Unlock P.85
Lock P.85
2 Power windows P.95
3 Exterior mirror operation
P.105
4 Lights
Lights off P.152
Daytime running lights P.155
Parking lights P.154
Automatic headlight
control P.153
Automatic high-beam P.155
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
37
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
Low beams P.154
Instrument lighting
P.157
Right roadside parking
light P.154
Left roadside parking
light P.154
5 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal P.121
High beams, headlight
flasher P.121
Automatic high-beam
P.155
Onboard Computer
P.132
6 Shift paddle P.128
7 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off
P.200
Dynamic radar cruise
control on/off P.204
Cruise control: store
speed P.200
Continuing cruise con-
trol/Pausing cruise control
P.200
Dynamic radar cruise
control: increase distance
P.200
Dynamic radar cruise
control: reduce distance
P.200
Cruise control rocker switch
P.200
8 Instrument cluster P.132
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Selection lists P.144
Volume, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Enter-
tainment and Communication
Voice activation system
P. 5 5
Telephone, see
Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Com-
munication
Thumbwheel for selection
lists P.144
10Shift paddle P.128
11Steering column stalk, right
Wiper P.121
Rain sensor P.122
Clean the windshield
P.123
12Adjust the steering wheel
P.107
38
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
13 Horn, entire surface
14 Unlock hood P.290
15 Unlocking the trunk lid
P. 8 1
1 Control Display P.46
2 Hazard warning sys-
tem P.312
3 Ventilation P.233
4 Glove compartment P.243
5 Radio/multimedia, see
Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, and
Communication
6 Automatic air conditioning
P.228
7 Controller with buttons P.46
8 Sport mode button
P.131
SPORT driving mode
Toyota Supra Safety
P.172
Auto Start/Stop func-
tion P.115
Parking Sensors P.214
Rearview camera P.220
RCTA (Rear cross traffic
alert) function P.224
VSC Vehicle Stability
Control System P.196
In the vicinity of the center console
1
4
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
39
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
9 Parking brake P.119
10Automatic transmission
selector lever P.125
11 Switch drive-ready
state on/off P.115
1 Indicator light,
front-seat passenger airbag
P.171
2 Reading lights P.158
3 Interior lights P.158
4 Emergency call, SOS
P.313
In the vicinity of the roofliner
40
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Depending on the situation, the
vehicle is in one of the three
states:
• Idle state.
• Standby state.
• Drive-ready state.
If the vehicle is in idle state, it is
switched off. All power consum-
ers are deactivated.
The vehicle is in idle state prior
to opening from the outside and
after exiting and locking.
Idle state, standby
state, and drive-ready
state
Vehicle features and
options
General information
Idle state
Concept
General information
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin
to move and possibly roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle
is secured against rolling away,
follow the following:
• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a
downhill slope, turn the front
wheels in the direction of the
curb.
• On uphill grades or on a
downhill slope, also secure the
vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals
can cause the vehicle to move
and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the fol-
lowing actions:
• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors
or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position
N.
• Using vehicle equipment.
41
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
The idle state is automatically
established under the following
conditions:
• After several minutes, if no
operation takes place on the
vehicle.
• If the charge state of the vehi-
cle battery is low.
• Depending on the setting via
Toyota Supra Command, if
one of the front doors is
opened when exiting the vehi-
cle.
The idle state is not automati-
cally established while a phone
call is active.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Door/Key"
4 "Turn off after door opening"
To establish idle state in the
vehicle after end of trip:
When standby state is switched
on, most functions can be used
while the vehicle is stationary.
Desired settings can be
adjusted.
The vehicle is in the standby
state after the front doors are
opened from the outside.
WARNING
There is a risk of accidents or inju-
ries. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle.
Take the remote control with you
when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Automatic idle state
Establishing idle state
when opening the front
doors
Manual idle state
Press and hold the
button until the
OFF indicator on
the instrument
cluster goes out.
Standby state
Concept
General information
Display in the instrument
cluster
OFF is displayed
in the instrument
cluster. The
drivetrain is
switched off and
standby state
switched on.
42
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
Switching on drive-ready state
corresponds to starting the
engine.
Some functions, such as VSC
Vehicle Stability Control System,
can only be used with
drive-ready state switched on.
1 Depress the brake pedal.
2 Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated auto-
matically for a brief time and is
stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Most of the indicator/warning
lights in the instrument cluster
light up for a varied length of
time.
Drive-ready state
Concept
General information
Safety information
WARNING
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or
ventilation is insufficient, harmful
exhaust gases can enter into the
vehicle. The exhaust gases con-
tain pollutants which are colorless
and odorless. In enclosed areas,
exhaust gases can also accumu-
late outside of the vehicle. There
is danger to life. Keep the exhaust
pipe free and ensure sufficient
ventilation.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin
to move and possibly roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle
is secured against rolling away,
follow the following:
• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a
downhill slope, turn the front
wheels in the direction of the
curb.
• On uphill grades or on a
downhill slope, also secure the
vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
NOTICE
In the case of repeated starting
attempts or repeated starting in
quick succession, the fuel is not
burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can over-
heat. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid repeated starting
in quick succession.
Switching on drive-ready
state
Concept
Drive-ready state
is switched on via
the Start/Stop but-
ton:
Automatic transmission
43
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
Depending on the engine condi-
tion, the full drive power may not
be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the
engine. In this case, the vehicle
will not accelerate as usual.
When drive-ready state is
switched on, the tachometer
shows the current engine
speed.
1 Engage selector lever posi-
tion P with the vehicle
stopped.
2 Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The
vehicle switches into standby state.
3 Set the parking brake.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g.,
due to the selected options or
country versions. This also
applies to safety-related func-
tions and systems. When using
these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regula-
tions must be observed.
The Toyota Supra Command
combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can
be operated via the Controller
and, depending on the equip-
ment version, the touchscreen.
Gasoline engine
Display in the instrument
cluster
Switching off drive-ready
state
Toyota Supra Com-
mand
Vehicle features and
options
Concept
44
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
Letters and numbers can be
entered using the Controller or
the touchscreen. The key-
board's display changes auto-
matically.
When entering names and
addresses, the choice is nar-
rowed down with every letter
entered and letters may be
added automatically.
Entries are continuously com-
pared with data stored in the
vehicle.
• Only those letters are offered
during entry for which data is
available.
• Destination search: place
names can be entered in all
languages that are available
in Toyota Supra Command.
Several menu items are pre-
ceded by a checkbox. The
checkbox indicates whether the
function is activated or deacti-
vated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the
function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
The status field can be found in
the upper area of the Control
Display. Status information is
displayed in the form of sym-
bols.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated informa-
tion systems and communication
devices while driving can distract
from traffic. It is possible to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a
risk of an accident. Only use the
systems or devices when the traf-
fic situation allows. As warranted,
stop and use the systems and
devices while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Input and display
Letters and numbers
Symbol Function
or
Change between capital
and lower-case letters.
Insert blank space.
Use voice activation.
Confirm entry.
Entry comparison
Activating/deactivating the
functions
Status information
General information
45
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
■
Radio
■
Telephone
■
Entertainment
■
Additional symbols
Additional information can be
displayed in several menus on
the right side of the split screen
display, the so-called split
screen, for instance information
from the Onboard Computer.
The additional information
remains visible even when
switching to another menu on
the split screen.
1 Press the button.
2 "Split screen"
Status field symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being
received.
Satellite radio is switched
on.
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellu-
lar network.
Network search.
Cellular network is not
available.
The critical charge state
of the mobile phone has
been reached.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message
received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are loaded.
Symbol Meaning
Music hard disc.
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has
been switched off.
Request for the current
vehicle position.
Checking the current
vehicle position.
Split screen, split screen
display
General information
Switching on/off
Symbol Meaning
46
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
The display can be selected in
menus, where the split screen is
supported.
1 Move the Controller to the
right until the split screen is
selected.
2 Press the Controller.
3 Select the desired setting.
It is possible to specify the num-
ber of displays.
1 Move the Controller to the
right until the split screen is
selected.
2 Press the Controller.
3 "Personalize menu"
4 Select the desired setting.
5 Move the Controller to the
left.
1 Control Display, with touch-
screen depending on the
equipment version
2 Controller with buttons and,
depending on the equipment
version, with touchpad
To clean the Control Display, fol-
low the care instructions, refer to
page 325.
In the case of very high tem-
peratures on the Control Dis-
play, for instance due to intense
solar radiation, the brightness
may be reduced down to com-
plete deactivation. Once the
temperature is reduced, for
instance through shade or air
conditioning, the normal func-
tions are restored.
The Control Display is switched
on automatically after unlocking.
Selecting the display
Specifying the number of
displays
Control elements
Overview
1
2
Control Display
General information
Safety information
NOTICE
Objects in the area in the front of
the Control Display can shift and
damage the Control Display.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Do not place objects in the
area in front of the Control Dis-
play.
Switching on/off automati-
cally
47
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
In certain situations, the Control
Display is switched off automati-
cally, for instance if no operation
is performed on the vehicle for
several minutes.
The Control Display can also be
switched off manually.
1 Press the button.
2 "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any but-
ton on the Controller to switch it
back on again.
The buttons can be used to
open the menus directly. The
Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the set-
tings.
Some Toyota Supra Command
functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller,
refer to page 52.
• Turn to switch between menu
items, for example.
• Press to select a menu item,
for example.
• Tilt in four directions to switch
between displays, for exam-
ple.
Switching on/off manually
Controller with navigation
system
General information
Operation
48
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
The buttons can be used to
open the menus directly. The
Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the set-
tings.
• Turn to switch between menu
items, for example.
• Press to select a menu item,
for example.
• Tilt in two directions to switch
between displays, for exam-
ple.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main
menu.
Press twice: display all
menu items of the main
menu.
Open the Communication
menu.
Open the Media/Radio
menu.
Open destination input
menu for navigation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the
previous display.
Press and hold: open the
menus used last.
Open the Options menu.
Controller without naviga-
tion system
General information
Operation
49
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All Toyota Supra Command
functions can be called up via
the main menu.
1 Press the button twice.
All menu items of the main menu
are displayed.
2 Select a menu item.
3 To move the menu item to the
desired position, tilt the Con-
troller to the right or left.
Highlighted menu items can be
selected.
1 Turn the Controller until the
desired menu item is high-
lighted.
2 Press the Controller.
After a menu item is selected,
for instance "System settings", a
new display appears.
• Move the Controller to the left.
The current display closes and the
previous display is shown.
• Press the button.
The previous display re-opens.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main
menu.
Press twice: display all
menu items of the main
menu.
Open the Communication
menu.
Open the Media/Radio
menu.
Press once: open the
previous display.
Press and hold: open the
menus used last.
Open the Options menu.
Operating with the Con-
troller
Opening the main menu
Adapting the main menu
Selecting menu items
Changing between dis-
plays
50
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
• Move the Controller to the
right.
The new display opens.
An arrow indicates that addi-
tional displays can be opened.
Press and hold this button.
The recently used menus are
displayed.
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is dis-
played.
The menu consists of various
areas:
• Screen settings, for instance
"Split screen".
• Control options for the
selected main menu, for
instance for "Media/Radio".
• If applicable, further operating
options for the selected menu,
for instance "Save station".
Settings, such as brightness,
can be entered.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Displays"
4 "Control display"
5 "Brightness at night"
6 Turn the Controller until the
desired setting is displayed.
7 Press the Controller.
1 Turn the Controller: select let-
ters or numbers.
2 : confirm entry.
For alphabetical lists with more
than 30 entries, the letters for
which there is an entry are dis-
played at the left edge.
1 Turn the Controller to the left
or right quickly.
All letters for which there are
entries are displayed on the left
edge.
Opening recently used
menus
Opening the Options
menu
Changing settings
Entering letters and num-
bers
Input
Deleting
Symbol Function
Press the Controller:
delete letters or number.
Hold the Controller down:
delete all letters or num-
bers.
Using alphabetical lists
51
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
2 Select the first letter of the
desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter
is displayed.
Depending on the equipment
version, the Control Display is
equipped with a touchscreen.
Touch screen with your fingers.
Do not use any objects.
Tap on symbol.
The main menu is displayed.
All Toyota Supra Command
functions can be called up via
the main menu.
1 Tap on symbol.
All menu items of the main menu
are displayed.
2 Drag the menu item to the
desired position on the right
or left.
Tap desired menu item.
You can display dynamic con-
tents within the menu items. The
contents of the menu items
update automatically, e.g., the
active destination guidance in
the navigation. To access the
dynamic content directly, tap on
the lower section of the menu
item.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Contents of main menu"
After a menu item is selected, a
new display opens.
An arrow indicates that addi-
tional displays can be opened.
• Swipe to the left.
Operating via touch-
screen
General information
Opening the main menu
Adapting the main menu
Selecting menu items
Dynamic contents
Changing between dis-
plays
52
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
• Tap arrow.
New display is opened.
Settings such as brightness can
be changed via the touch-
screen.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Displays"
4 "Control display"
5 "Brightness at night"
6 To create the desired setting:
• Slide in the selected field to
the right or left, until the
desired setting is displayed.
• , Tap on symbol.
1 Touch the symbol on the
touchscreen.
A keyboard is displayed in the Con-
trol Display.
2 Enter letters and numbers.
The navigation map can be
moved with the touchscreen.
Some Toyota Supra Command
functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Touchpad"
4 Select desired setting:
• "Speller": enter letters and
numbers.
• "Map": using the map.
• "Search fields": write letters
Changing settings
Entering letters and num-
bers
Input
Deleting
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol:
delete the letter or num-
ber.
Tapping and holding the
symbol for an extended
period: delete all letters
or numbers.
Operating navigation map
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out
with the fingers.
Touchpad
General information
Selecting functions
53
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
without selecting the list field.
• "Audio feedback": pro-
nounces entered letters and
numbers.
Entering letters requires some
practice at the beginning. When
entering, pay attention to the fol-
lowing:
• The system distinguishes
between upper and
lower-case letters and num-
bers. To make entries, it may
be necessary to change
between upper and
lower-case letters, numbers
and characters, refer to page
50.
• Enter characters as they are
displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
• Always enter associated char-
acters, such as accents or
periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. The set
language determines what
input is possible. Where nec-
essary, enter special charac-
ters via the Controller.
The map in the navigation sys-
tem can be moved via the
touchpad.
Entering letters and num-
bers
Entering special charac-
ters
Entry Operation
Delete a charac-
ter.
Swipe to the left
on the touchpad.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the
right in the cen-
ter of the
touchpad.
Enter a hyphen.
Swipe to the
right in the upper
area of the
touchpad.
Enter an under-
score.
Swipe to the
right in the lower
area of the
touchpad.
Using the map
Function Operation
Move map.
Swipe in the
appropriate
direction.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on
the touchpad
with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
54
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
The Toyota Supra Command
functions can be stored on the
programmable memory buttons
and called up directly, for
instance radio stations, naviga-
tion destinations and phone
numbers.
Settings are stored for the driver
profile currently used.
1 Select function via Toyota
Supra Command.
2 Press and hold the
desired button until a signal
sounds.
Press the button.
The function will work immedi-
ately. This means, for instance
that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Touch buttons with finger. Do
not wear gloves or use objects.
The button assignment is dis-
played at the top edge of
screen.
1 Press and hold buttons 1 and
8 simultaneously for approx.
5 seconds.
2 "OK"
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
Storing a function
Running a function
Displaying the key assign-
ment
Deleting the button
assignments
55
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g.,
due to the selected options or
country versions. This also
applies to safety-related func-
tions and systems. When using
these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regula-
tions must be observed.
Most functions displayed on the
Control Display can be operated
by voice commands via the
voice activation system. The
system supports you with
announcements during input.
• Functions that can only be
used when the vehicle is sta-
tionary can only be operated
via the voice activation sys-
tem to a limited extent.
• The system uses a special
microphone on the driver's
side.
• ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual
denotes verbal instructions to
use with the voice activation
system.
• A language must be set via
Toyota Supra Command that
is supported by the voice acti-
vation system. To set the lan-
guage, refer to page 58
• Always say commands in the
language of the voice activa-
tion system.
1 Press the button on the
steering wheel.
2 Wait for the signal.
3 Say the command.
No other commands may be
available. In this case, operate
the function via Toyota Supra
Command.
Voice activation sys-
tem
Vehicle features and
options
Concept
General information
Functional requirements
Using the voice activa-
tion system
Activating the voice acti-
vation system
The symbol on the Control
Display indicates that
voice activation system is
active.
56
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
Most menu items on the Control
Display can be voiced as com-
mands.
Commands from other menus
can also be spoken.
You may select list entries such
as phone list entries via voice
activation. Read these list
entries out loud exactly as they
are shown in the respective list.
The following is displayed in the
top area of the Control Display:
• Some possible commands for
the current menu.
• Some possible commands
from other menus.
• Status of the voice recogni-
tion.
• Encrypted connection is
not available.
• To have the available spoken
instructions read out loud:
›Voice commands‹.
• To have information on the
operating principle of the
voice activation system read
out loud: ›General information
on voice control‹.
• To have help for the current
menu read out loud: ›Help‹.
Do not use the voice activation
system to initiate an Emergency
Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily
delay the establishment of a
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button,
refer to page 313, close to the
interior mirror.
The language to be used for
voice activation and system
announcements can be set.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 If necessary, "Language"
4 "Language:"
5 Select the desired language.
Terminating the voice acti-
vation system
Press the button on the
steering wheel or ›Can-
cel‹.
Possible commands
General information
Displaying possible com-
mands
Help on the voice activa-
tion system
Information for Emergency
Requests
Adjusting
Setting the language
57
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
You can set the system to use
standard dialog or a short ver-
sion.
The short version of the voice
dialog plays back short mes-
sages in abbreviated form.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Language"
4 "Speech mode:"
5 Select the desired setting.
It is possible to answer during
inquiries of the voice activation
system. The function can be
deactivated if inquiries are often
undesirably interrupted, for
instance due to background
noise or talking.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Language"
4 "Speaking during voice out-
put"
Online speech processing pro-
vides a dictation function, a nat-
ural method of entering
destinations and improves the
quality of voice recognition. To
use the functions, data is trans-
mitted to a service provider via
an encrypted connection and
stored locally there.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Language"
4 "Server speech recognition"
Turn the volume button during
the spoken instructions until the
desired volume is set.
• The volume remains constant
even if the volume of other
audio sources is changed.
• The volume is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
• Certain noises can be
detected and may lead to
problems. Keep the doors,
windows and convertible top
closed.
• Noises from the front passen-
ger or the rear seat bench can
impair the system. Avoid mak-
ing other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
• Major language dialects can
cause problems with the voice
recognition feature. Speak
loud and clear.
Setting the voice dialog
Speaking during voice
output
Online speech processing
Adjusting the volume
System limits
58
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
A smartphone connected to the
vehicle can be used via voice
activation.
Activate voice command
response on the smartphone for
this purpose.
1 Press and hold the but-
ton on the steering wheel for
approx. 3 seconds.
Voice command response is acti-
vated on the smartphone.
2 Release the button.
If activation is successful, a confir-
mation appears on the Control Dis-
play.
If it was not possible to activate
voice command response, the
list of Bluetooth devices appears
on the Control Display.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g.,
due to the selected options or
country versions. This also
applies to safety-related func-
tions and systems. When using
these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regula-
tions must be observed.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 If necessary, "Language"
4 "Language:"
5 Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Voice dialog for the voice activa-
tion system, refer to page 56.
Using a smartphone via
voice activation
General settings
Vehicle features and
options
Language
Setting the language
Setting the voice dialog
59
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Date and time"
4 "Time zone:"
5 Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Date and time"
4 "Time"
5 Turn the Controller until the
desired hours are displayed.
6 Press the Controller.
7 Turn the Controller until the
desired minutes are dis-
played.
8 Press the Controller.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Date and time"
4 "Time format:"
5 Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Depending on your vehicle's
optional features, the time, date
and, if needed, the time zone
are updated automatically.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Date and time"
4 "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Date and time"
4 "Date:"
5 Turn the Controller until the
desired day is displayed.
6 Press the Controller.
7 Make the settings for the
month and year.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
Time
Setting the time zone
Setting the time
Setting the time format
Automatic time setting
Date
Setting the date
Setting the date format
60
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Date and time"
4 "Date format:"
5 Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Depending on the country ver-
sion, you can set the units of
measurement for some values,
for instance consumption, dis-
tances, and temperature.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Units"
4 Select the desired menu
item.
5 Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
If vehicle location has been acti-
vated, the current vehicle posi-
tion can be displayed in the
Toyota Supra Apps.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Vehicle tracking"
4 "Vehicle tracking"
For some functions, popup win-
dows are displayed automati-
cally on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows
can be activated or deactivated.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Pop-ups"
4 Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Displays"
4 "Control display"
5 "Brightness at night"
6 Turn the Controller until the
desired brightness is set.
Setting the units of mea-
surement
Activating/deactivating
the display of the current
vehicle position
Concept
Activating/deactivating
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
Control Display
Brightness
61
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
7 Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Depending on the light condi-
tions, the brightness settings
may not be clearly visible.
For some menu items of the
main menu, the displayed con-
tents can be selected.
1 Press button.
2 "Contents of main menu"
3 Select the desired menu and
the desired content.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
The menu centrally displays all
messages arriving in the vehicle
in list form.
The following messages can be
displayed:
• Traffic messages.
• Vehicle messages.
• Communication messages,
for example emails, SMS text
messages or reminders.
• Service requirements mes-
sages.
Messages are additionally dis-
played in the status field.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "Notifications"
2 Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened,
where the message is dis-
played.
All messages, except vehicle
messages, can be deleted from
the list. Vehicle messages are
displayed as long as they are
relevant.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "Notifications"
2 Select the desired message.
3 Press button.
4 "Delete this notification" or
"Delete all notifications"
The following settings can be
adjusted:
• Select the applications, from
which messages will be per-
mitted.
• Sort the messages according
to date or priority.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
Selecting the contents of
the main menu
Messages
Concept
General information
Retrieving messages
Deleting messages
Adjusting
62
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Notifications"
4 Select the desired setting.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The vehicle offers different func-
tions, whose use requires a data
transfer to Toyota or a service
provider. The data transfer can
be deactivated for some func-
tions.
With data transfer deactivated,
the respective function cannot
be used.
Only make these settings while
stationary.
Personal settings
Vehicle features and
options
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
General information
63
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
Follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Data privacy"
4 Select the desired setting.
Depending on the usage, the
vehicle stores personal data,
such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be per-
manently deleted using Toyota
Supra Command.
Depending on the equipment
package, the following data can
be deleted:
• Driver profile settings.
• Stored radio stations.
• Stored programmable mem-
ory buttons.
• Travel and Onboard Com-
puter information.
• Music hard disc.
• Navigation, for instance
stored destinations.
• Phone book.
• Online data, for instance
Favorites, cookies.
• Office data, for instance voice
notes.
• Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the
data can take up to 15 minutes.
Data can only be deleted while
stationary.
Heed and follow the instructions
on the Control Display.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Data privacy"
4 "Delete personal data"
5 "Delete personal data"
6 "OK"
7 Exit and lock the vehicle.
The deletion process takes 15
minutes to complete.
If not all of the data was deleted,
repeat the deletion.
Switch on the drive-ready state
to cancel deletion of the data.
Activating/deactivating
Deleting personal data in
the vehicle
Concept
General information
Functional requirement
Deleting data
Canceling deletion
64
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
In the driver profiles, individual
settings for several drivers can
be stored and called up again
when required.
There are three driver profiles
with which personal vehicle set-
tings can be stored. Every
remote control has one of these
driver profiles assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a
remote control, the assigned
personal driver profile will be
activated. All settings stored in
the driver profile are automati-
cally applied.
If several drivers use their own
remote control, the vehicle will
adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings
are also restored, if the vehicle
has been used in the meantime
by a person with a different
remote control.
Changes to the settings are
automatically stored in the driver
profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is
selected via Toyota Supra Com-
mand, the settings stored in it
will be applied automatically.
The new driver profile is
assigned to the vehicle key that
is currently in use.
There is an additional guest pro-
file available that is not assigned
to any vehicle key. It can be
used to apply settings in the
vehicle without changing the
personal driver profiles.
For the system to be able to
identify the driver profile associ-
ated to a particular driver, the
detected remote control must be
clearly allocated to the driver.
This is the case when:
• The driver is only carrying his
or her own remote control.
• The driver unlocks the vehi-
cle.
• The driver gets into the vehi-
cle through the driver's door.
After switching on the Control
Display, the name of the active
driver profile is displayed.
Select driver profile, refer to
page 65.
As soon as the engine is started
or any key is pressed, the last
selected display is shown on the
Control Display.
To exit the welcome screen via
Toyota Supra Command: "OK"
Driver profile
Concept
General information
Functional requirements
Active driver profile
65
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
The settings for the following
systems and functions are
stored in the active driver profile.
The scope of storable settings
depends on country and equip-
ment.
• Unlocking and locking.
• Lights.
• Climate control.
• Radio.
• Instrument cluster.
• Programmable memory but-
tons.
• Volumes, tone.
• Control Display.
•TV.
• Parking Sensors.
• Rearview camera.
• Head-up Display.
• Sport mode switch.
• Seat position, exterior mirror
position.
Both the positions saved via the
seat memory and the last position
set are saved.
• Toyota Supra Safety.
Regardless of the remote con-
trol in use, a different driver pro-
file may be activated. This
allows you to call up personal
vehicle settings, even if you did
not unlock the vehicle with your
own remote control.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Driver profiles"
3 Select driver profile.
4 "OK"
• All settings stored in the
called-up driver profile are
automatically applied.
• The called-up driver profile is
assigned to the remote con-
trol being used at the time.
• If the driver profile is already
assigned to a different remote
control, this driver profile will
apply to both remote controls.
The guest profile is for individual
settings that are stored in none
of the three personal driver pro-
files.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Driver profiles"
3 "Drive off (guest)"
4 "OK"
The guest profile cannot be
renamed. It is not assigned to
the current remote control.
A personal name can be
assigned to the active driver
profile to avoid confusion
between the driver profiles.
Adjusting
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Guest profile
Renaming a driver profile
66
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Driver profiles"
3 Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with
this symbol can be renamed.
4 "Change driver profile name"
5 Enter profile name.
6 Select the symbol.
The settings of the active driver
profile are reset to their factory
settings.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Driver profiles"
3 Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with
this symbol can be reset.
4 "Reset driver profile"
5 "OK"
Most settings of the active driver
profile can be exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing
and retrieving personal set-
tings, for instance before deliv-
ering the vehicle to a workshop.
The stored driver profiles can be
taken into another vehicle.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Driver profiles"
3 Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with
this symbol can be exported.
4 "Export driver profile"
5 Select a storage device for
exporting the driver profile.
• "USB device"
Select USB storage device, as
needed, refer to page 71.
The existing settings of the
active driver profile are overwrit-
ten with the settings of the
imported driver profile.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Driver profiles"
3 Select the driver profile to be
overwritten.
The driver profile marked with
this symbol can be overwritten.
4 "Import driver profile"
5 Select a storage device for
importing the driver profile.
• USB storage device: "USB
device"
Select USB storage device as
needed.
6 Select the driver profile to be
imported.
A clear assignment between the
remote control and driver may
Resetting a driver profile
Exporting driver profiles
Importing driver profiles
System limits
67
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
not be possible in the following
cases, for example.
• The passenger unlocks the
vehicle with his or her own
remote control, but another
person is driving.
• The driver unlocks the vehicle
via Smart Key System and
has multiple remote controls
with him or her.
• The driver changes, but the
vehicle is not locked and
unlocked.
• Multiple remote controls are
located outside of the vehicle.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for
instance, due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Various connection types are
available for using mobile
devices in the vehicle. The con-
nection type to select depends
on the mobile device and the
desired function.
The following overview shows
possible functions and the suit-
able connection types for them.
The scope of functions depends
on the mobile device.
Connections
Vehicle features and
options
Concept
General information
68
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
The following connection types
require one-time pairing with the
vehicle:
• Bluetooth.
• Apple CarPlay.
• Screen Mirroring.
Paired devices are automatically
recognized later on and con-
nected to the vehicle.
• Compatible device with
Bluetooth interface.
• The remote control is in the
vehicle.
• The device is ready for opera-
tion.
• Bluetooth is switched on in
the vehicle, refer to page 69,
and on the device.
• Bluetooth presetting, such as
visibility, may be required on
the device; refer to the
owner's manual of the device.
Function
Connection
type
Making calls via the
hands-free system.
Using phone func-
tions via Toyota
Supra Command.
Using the
smartphone Office
functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from
the smartphone or
the audio player.
Bluetooth or
USB.
Using compatible
apps via Toyota
Supra Command.
Bluetooth or
USB.
USB storage device:
Exporting and
importing driver pro-
files.
Exporting and
importing stored
trips.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from
the smartphone or
the USB storage
device.
USB.
Use Apple CarPlay
apps via Toyota
Supra Command and
voice operation.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
Screen Mirroring:
Showing the
smartphone display
on the Control Dis-
play.
WiFi
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated informa-
tion systems and communication
devices while driving can distract
from traffic. It is possible to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a
risk of an accident. Only use the
systems or devices when the traf-
fic situation allows. As warranted,
stop and use the systems and
devices while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
69
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 "Settings"
5 "Bluetooth®"
To use all supported functions of
a mobile phone, the following
functions must be activated prior
to pairing the mobile phone with
the vehicle.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 "Settings"
5 Select desired setting:
•"Office"
Activate function to transmit short
messages, e-mails, calendars,
tasks, notes, and reminders to the
vehicle. Costs can be incurred by
transmitting all data to the vehicle.
• "Contact images"
Activate function to show the con-
tact pictures.
6 Move the Controller to the
left.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 "Connect new device"
5 Select functions:
• "Telephone"
• "Bluetooth® audio"
• "Apps"
• "Apple CarPlay"
• "Screen Mirroring"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle
is displayed on the Control Display.
6 On the mobile device, search
for Bluetooth devices in the
vicinity.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle
appears on the mobile device dis-
play.
Select the Bluetooth name of the
vehicle.
7 Depending on the mobile
device, a control number is
displayed or the control num-
ber must be entered.
• Compare the control number
displayed on the Control Dis-
play with the control number
on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the
device and on the Control Display.
• Enter and confirm the same
control number on the device
and via Toyota Supra Com-
mand.
Switching on Bluetooth
Activating/deactivating
telephone functions
Pairing the mobile device
with the vehicle
70
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
The device is connected and dis-
played in the device list, refer to
page 74.
All requirements are met and all
required steps were completed
in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not
function as expected.
In this case, the following expla-
nations can help:
Why could the mobile phone not
be paired or connected?
• There are too many Bluetooth
devices connected to the
mobile phone or vehicle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth
connections with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connec-
tions from the device list on the
mobile phone and start a new
device search.
• The mobile phone is in
power-save mode or has only
a limited remaining battery
life.
Charge mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no
longer react?
• The applications on the
mobile phone do not function
anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on
again.
• Too high or too low ambient
temperature for mobile phone
operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to
extreme ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be
used via Toyota Supra Com-
mand?
• The mobile phone may not be
properly configured, for
instance as Bluetooth audio
device.
Connect the mobile phone with the
telephone or additional phone func-
tion.
Why are no or not all phone
book entries displayed or why
are they incomplete?
• Transmission of the phone
book entries is not yet com-
plete.
• It is possible that only the
phone book entries of the
mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
• It may not be possible to dis-
play phone book entries with
special characters.
• It may not be possible to
transmit contacts from social
networks.
• The number of phone book
entries to be stored is too
high.
• Data volume of the contact
too large, for instance due to
stored information such as
notes.
Reduce the data volume of the con-
tact.
• A mobile phone can only be
connected as audio source or
as telephone.
Frequently asked ques-
tions
71
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
Configure the mobile phone and
connect it with the telephone or
additional phone function.
How can the phone connection
quality be improved?
• Adjust the strength of the
Bluetooth signal on the mobile
phone, depending on the
mobile phone.
• Insert mobile phone into the
wireless charging tray.
• Adjust the volume of the
microphone and loudspeak-
ers separately in the sound
settings.
If all points in this list have been
checked and the required func-
tion is still not available, contact
the Toyota dealer.
Mobile devices with a USB port
are connected to the USB inter-
face.
• Mobile phones.
• Audio devices such as MP3
players.
• USB storage devices.
Common file systems are sup-
ported. FAT32 and exFAT are the
recommended formats.
A connected USB storage
device will be supplied with
charging current via the USB
interface if the device supports
this. Observe the maximum
charge current of the USB inter-
face.
The following uses are possible
on USB interfaces with data
transfer:
• Exporting and importing driver
profiles, refer to page 64.
• Playing music files via USB
audio.
• Playing videos via USB video.
Follow the following when con-
necting:
• Do not use force when plug-
ging the connector into the
USB interface.
• Use a flexible adapter cable.
• Protect the USB storage
device against mechanical
damage.
• Due to the large number of
USB media available on the
market, it cannot be guaran-
teed that every device is oper-
able on the vehicle.
• Do not expose USB media to
extreme environmental condi-
tions, such as very high tem-
peratures; refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
• Due to the many different
compression techniques,
proper playback of the media
stored on the USB storage
device cannot be guaranteed
in all cases.
• To ensure proper transmis-
sion of the stored data, do not
charge a USB storage device
via the onboard socket, when
USB connection
General information
72
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
it is connected to the USB
interface.
• Depending on how the USB
storage device is being used,
settings may be required on
the USB storage device, refer
to the owner's manual of the
device.
Not compatible USB media:
• USB hard drives.
• USB hubs.
• USB memory card readers
with multiple inserts.
• HFS-formatted USB media.
• Devices such as fans or
lamps.
Compatible device with USB
interface.
The USB storage device is dis-
played in the device list, refer to
page 74.
CarPlay allows certain func-
tions of a compatible Apple
iPhone to be used via Siri voice
operation and Toyota Supra
Command.
• Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or
later.
• Corresponding mobile wire-
less contract.
• Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice
operation are activated on the
iPhone.
• Booking the Toyota Supra
Connect service: Apple Car-
Play preparation.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 "Settings"
5 Select the following settings:
• "Bluetooth®"
• "Apple CarPlay"
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with
the vehicle, refer to page 68.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the
vehicle and displayed in the
device list, refer to page 74.
Functional requirement
Connecting the device
Apple CarPlay prepara-
tion
Concept
Functional requirements
Switching on Bluetooth
and CarPlay
Pairing iPhone with Car-
Play
73
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
For more information, refer to
the NAVIGATION SYSTEM
OWNER'S MANUAL.
All requirements are met and all
required steps were completed
in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not
function as expected.
In this case, the following expla-
nations can help:
The iPhone has already been
paired with Apple CarPlay.
When a new connection is
established, CarPlay can no lon-
ger be selected.
• Delete the iPhone concerned
from the device list.
• On the iPhone, delete the
vehicle concerned from the
list of stored vehicles under
Bluetooth and under WiFi.
• Pair the iPhone as a new
device.
If the steps listed have been car-
ried out and the required func-
tion is still not available: contact
the Toyota dealer.
Screen Mirroring enables mirror-
ing (outputting) of the
smartphone display on the Con-
trol Display.
• Compatible smartphone with
Screen Mirroring interface.
• Screen Mirroring is switched
on on the smartphone.
• WiFi is switched on in the
vehicle.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 "Settings"
5 "Vehicle Wi-Fi®"
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 "Connect new device"
5 "Screen Mirroring"
The WiFi name of the vehicle is dis-
played on the Control Display.
6 Search for WiFi devices in
the surroundings of the
smartphone.
The WiFi name of the vehicle
appears on the device display.
Operation
Frequently asked ques-
tions
Screen Mirroring
General information
Functional requirements
Activating WiFi
Pairing a smartphone with
Screen Mirroring
74
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
Select the WiFi name of the vehi-
cle.
7 Confirm the connection via
Toyota Supra Command.
The device is connected and
displayed in the device list, refer
to page 74.
• After one-time pairing, the
devices are automatically rec-
ognized and reconnected
when standby state is
switched on.
• The data stored on the SIM
card or in the mobile phone
are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
• For some devices, certain set-
tings are necessary, for
instance authorization; see
the owner's manual of the
device.
All devices paired with or con-
nected to the vehicle are dis-
played in the device list.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which
function a device is used.
Functions can be activated or
deactivated for paired and con-
nected devices.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 Select the desired device.
5 Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a
device, the function will be deac-
tivated where appropriate for a
device that is already connected
and the device will be discon-
nected.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 Select a device.
5 "Disconnect device"
Managing mobile devices
General information
Displaying the device list
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Apple CarPlay"
"Screen Mirroring"
Configuring the device
Disconnecting the device
75
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
3
AT A GLANCE
The device remains paired and
can be connected again, refer to
page 75.
A disconnected device can be
reconnected.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 Select device.
5 "Connect device"
The functions that were
assigned to the device before
disconnecting are assigned to
the device when it is recon-
nected. The functions may be
deactivated on a device already
connected.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 Select device.
5 "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and
removed from the device list.
If two mobile phones are con-
nected to the vehicle, the func-
tions of the phone and additional
phone can be switched.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Mobile devices"
4 "Settings"
5 "Swap telephone/additional
tel."
Connecting the device
Deleting the device
Swapping the telephone
and additional phone
76
3-1. AT A GLANCE
Supra Owner's Manual
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The printed Owner's Manual
describes all standard, coun-
try-specific, and optional fea-
tures offered with the series.
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and
options
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
77
Supra Owner's Manual
4
4
CONTROLS
CONTROLS
.
4-1. CONTROLS
Opening and closing ......78
Seats, mirrors, and steering
wheel............................96
Transporting children safely
.................................. 109
Driving ......................... 115
Displays ...................... 132
Lights .......................... 152
Safety .......................... 159
Driving stability control sys-
tems .......................... 195
Driver assistance systems
.................................. 200
Driving comfort ............ 227
Climate control ............ 228
Interior equipment ....... 236
Storage compartments
.................................. 242
Cargo area .................. 244
78
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4-1.CONTROLS
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The vehicle is supplied with two
remote controls with integrated
key.
Each remote control contains a
replaceable battery. Replacing
the battery, refer to page 82.
You may set the button func-
tions, depending on the vehicle
equipment and country version.
Settings, refer to page 90.
A driver profile, refer to page 64,
with personal settings can be
assigned to a remote control.
To prevent possible locking in of
the remote control, take the
remote control with you when
exiting the vehicle.
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and
options
Remote control
General information
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle
can lock the doors from the inside
and lock themselves in. In this
case, the vehicle cannot be
opened from the outside. There is
a risk of injury. Take the remote
control with you so that the vehi-
cle can be opened from the out-
side.
WARNING
For some country versions,
unlocking from the inside is only
possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy
time in the vehicle while being
exposed to extreme tempera-
tures are at risk of injury or death.
Do not lock the vehicle from the
outside when there are people in
it.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals
can cause the vehicle to move
and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the fol-
lowing actions:
• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors
or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position
N.
• Using vehicle equipment.
79
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the trunk lid
4 Press and hold or press three
times in quick succession:
panic mode
Press briefly: headlight cour-
tesy delay feature
The behavior of the vehicle
when unlocking with the remote
control depends on the following
settings, refer to page 90, for
unlocking and locking:
• If only the driver's door and
the fuel filler flap or all access
to the vehicle will be
unlocked.
• If the unlocking of vehicle is
confirmed with a light signal
or a sound signal.
• If the welcome light, refer to
page 155, is switched on
when the vehicle is being
unlocked.
• If the exterior mirrors are
automatically folded out and
in when the vehicle is
unlocked and locked.
• If the driver's seat is set to the
last position saved in the
driver's profile. P.64
If, due to the settings, only the
driver's door and fuel filler flap
were unlocked, press the button
on the remote control again to
unlock the other vehicle access
points.
In addition, the following func-
tions are executed:
• If a driver profile, refer to page
64, was assigned to the
remote control, this driver pro-
file will be activated and the
settings that are stored in it
will be applied.
• The interior lights are
switched on, unless they were
manually switched off. Switch
the interior lights on/off manu-
ally, refer to page 158.
• With alarm system: The alarm
system, refer to page , will be
WARNING
There is a risk of accidents or inju-
ries. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle.
Take the remote control with you
when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
Unlocking
General information
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the
remote control.
80
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
switched off.P.92
After opening one of the front
doors, the vehicle is ready for
operation, refer to page 41.
The light functions may depend
on the ambient brightness.
The windows are opened, as
long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
The behavior of the vehicle
during locking with the remote
control depends on the following
settings, refer to page 90:
• If the locking of the vehicle is
confirmed with a light signal
or a sound signal.
• If the exterior mirrors are
automatically folded in and
out when the vehicle is locked
and unlocked.
• If the headlight courtesy delay
feature, refer to page 155, is
activated during locking.
1 Close the driver's door.
2 Press the button on the
remote control.
The following functions are exe-
cuted:
• All doors, the trunk lid, and
the fuel filler flap are locked.
• With alarm system: The alarm
system, refer to page 92, will
be switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still
switched on when you lock the
vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
twice. In this case, the
drive-ready state must be
switched off by means of the
Start/Stop button.
The windows are closed in the
area close to the vehicle, as
long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Convenient opening
Opening
Press and hold the button
on the remote control.
Locking
General information
Locking the vehicle
With Smart Key System:
convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body
parts can be jammed. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the
area of movement of the doors is
clear during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold the button
on the remote control after
locking.
81
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The function is not available for
the first 10 seconds after lock-
ing.
• The interior lights are
switched on, unless they were
manually switched off. Switch
the interior lights on/off manu-
ally, refer to page 158.
• Depending on the settings,
the exterior lighting, refer to
page 155, will be switched on.
The light functions may depend
on the ambient brightness.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle,
do not place the remote control
in the cargo area.
You can set up if the doors will
be unlocked when the trunk lid
is opened with the remote con-
trol. Settings, refer to page 90.
You can trigger the alarm sys-
tem if you find yourself in a dan-
gerous situation.
To switch off the alarm: press
any button.
Switching on the interior
and exterior lights
Press the button on the
remote control with the
vehicle locked.
Trunk lid
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when
operating the trunk lid. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the
area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and clos-
ing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid piv-
ots back and up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure
that the area of movement of the
trunk lid is clear during opening
and closing.
Unlocking
Press and hold the button
on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
Panic mode
• Press the button on the
remote control and hold
for at least 3 seconds.
• Briefly press the button
on the remote control
three times in succes-
sion.
82
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Set the duration, refer to page
155.
1 Remove the integrated key
from the remote control, refer
to page 84.
2 Place the integrated key
underneath the battery com-
partment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the cover with a lever
movement of the integrated
key, arrow 2.
3 Push battery in the direction
of the arrow using a pointed
object and lift it out.
4 Insert a type CR 2032 battery
with the positive side facing
up.
5 Press the cover closed.
Additional remote controls are
available from your Toyota
dealer.
A lost remote control can be
blocked and replaced by your
Toyota dealer.
If the lost remote control has an
assigned driver profile, refer to
page 64, the connection to this
remote control must be deleted.
A new remote control can then
be assigned to the driver profile.
A vehicle message, refer to
page 133, is displayed.
Remote control detection by the
vehicle may malfunction under
the following circumstances:
• The battery of the remote
control is discharged. Replac-
Switching on the headlight
courtesy delay feature
Press and hold the button
on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
Replacing the battery
Have old batteries dis-
posed of by your Toyota
dealer or take them to a
collection point.
Additional remote controls
Loss of the remote con-
trols
Malfunction
General information
83
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
ing the battery, refer to page
82.
• Interference of the radio con-
nection from transmission
towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
• Shielding of the remote con-
trol due to metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control
together with metal objects.
• Interference of the radio con-
nection from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in
direct proximity to the remote
control.
Do not transport the remote control
together with electronic devices.
• Interference of radio transmis-
sion by a charging process of
mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
• The remote control is in direct
proximity of the wireless
charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a
different location.
In the case of interference, the
vehicle can be unlocked and
locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 84.
It is not possible to switch on the
drive-ready state if the remote
control has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1 Hold the remote control with
its back against the marked
area on the steering column.
Pay attention to the display in
the instrument cluster.
2 If the remote control is
detected: Switch on
drive-ready state within 10
seconds.
If the remote control is not
detected, slightly change the
position of the remote control
and repeat the procedure.
What precautions can be taken
to be able to open a vehicle with
an accidentally locked in remote
control?
• The options provided by the
Switching the drive-ready
state on via emergency
detection of the remote con-
trol
Frequently asked ques-
tions
84
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Remote Services of the
Toyota Supra Connect app
include the ability to lock and
unlock a vehicle.
This requires an active Toyota
Supra Connect contract and the
Toyota Supra Connect app must be
installed on a smartphone.
• Unlocking the vehicle can be
requested via the Concierge.
An active Toyota Supra Connect
contract is required.
The driver's door can be locked
and unlocked without remote
control using the integrated key.
The integrated key also fits the
glove compartment.
Press the button, arrow 1, and
pull out the integrated key, arrow
2.
1 Pull and hold the door handle
outward with one hand.
2 Guide one finger of your
other hand from the back
Integrated key
General information
Safety information
WARNING
For some country versions,
unlocking from the inside is only
possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy
time in the vehicle while being
exposed to extreme tempera-
tures are at risk of injury or death.
Do not lock the vehicle from the
outside when there are people in
it.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently
joined with the door. The door
handle can be moved. When pull-
ing the door handle with the inte-
grated key inserted, paint or the
integrated key can be damaged.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Remove the integrated key
before pulling the outside door
handle.
Removing
Locking/unlocking via the
door lock
85
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
under the cover and push the
cover out.
Use the thumb for counter support
to prevent the cover from falling out
of the door handle.
3 Remove the cover.
4 Unlock or lock the door lock
using the integrated key.
The other doors must be
unlocked or locked from the
inside.
The activated alarm system is
triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been
unlocked via the door lock.
The alarm system is not
switched on if the vehicle is
locked with the integrated key.
In the event of a severe acci-
dent, the vehicle is automatically
unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come
on.
Buttons for the central locking
system.
• The fuel filler flap remains
unlocked.
• The vehicle is not secured
against theft when locking.
Alarm system
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
Overview
Locking
Press the button with the
front doors closed.
Unlocking
Press the button.
86
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
• Press the button to
unlock all the doors.
Pull the door opener above the
armrest.
• Pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The
other doors remain locked.
The vehicle can be accessed
without activating the remote
control.
All you need to do is to have the
remote control with you, such as
in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically
detects the remote control when
it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
Comfort entry supports the fol-
lowing functions:
• Unlocking and locking the
vehicle from the door handle.
• To lock the vehicle, the
remote control must be
located outside of the vehicle
near the doors.
• The next unlocking and lock-
ing cycle is not possible until
after approx. 2 seconds.
The driver should always
carry the remote control on
their person and take it with
them when they leave the
vehicle.
Depending on the location of
the vehicle or the surround-
ing radio wave conditions, the
remote control may not oper-
ate normally. Make sure not to
carry the remote control with
an electronic device, such as
a mobile phone or computer.
Make sure to always take the
remote control with you when
you leave the vehicle, in case
the battery of the remote con-
trol is depleted or the remote
control is malfunctioning.
Opening
Smart Key System
Concept
General information
Functional requirements
Important points
87
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Safety notes
WARNING
The vehicle transmits radio waves
whenever the Smart Key System
is used to lock or unlock the
doors, open the trunk lid, or when
the engine switch is operated.
Therefore, this system may affect
the operation of implantable car-
diac pacemakers and implantable
cardioverter defibrillators.
Persons with implantable cardiac
pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should
stay 22 cm or more away from the
vehicle when opening or closing a
door. Also, they should refrain
from leaning on the vehicle or
looking through the windows from
outside when a door is opened or
closed.
Users of any electrical medical
device other than implantable car-
diac pacemakers, cardiac
resynchronization therapy-pace-
makers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should
consult their doctor or the manu-
facturer of the device for informa-
tion about its operation under the
influence of radio waves.
88
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Near the front of the center console
Near the rear of the center console
In the luggage compartment and near the rear bumper
Near each door and door handle
The behavior of the vehicle
during unlocking via the Smart
Key System depends on the fol-
lowing settings, refer to page 90:
• If the unlocking of vehicle is
confirmed with a light signal
or a sound signal.
• If the welcome light, refer to
page 155, is switched on
when the vehicle is being
unlocked.
• If the exterior mirrors are
automatically folded out and
in when the vehicle is
unlocked and locked.
Effective range (areas within which Smart Key System radio
waves are transmitted)
A
B
C
D
Unlocking
General information
89
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Grasp the handle of a vehicle
door completely.
The behavior of the vehicle
during locking via the Smart Key
System depends on the follow-
ing settings, refer to page 90:
• If the locking of the vehicle is
confirmed with a light signal
or a sound signal.
• If the exterior mirrors are
automatically folded out and
in when the vehicle is
unlocked and locked.
• If the headlight courtesy delay
feature, refer to page 155, is
activated during locking.
Close the driver's door.
Touch the grooved surface on
the handle of a closed vehicle
door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the
door handle.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle,
do not place the remote control
in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equip-
ment and country version, it is
also possible to have the doors
unlocked. Adjusting the settings,
refer to page 90.
Unlocking the vehicle
Locking
General information
Locking the vehicle
Trunk lid
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when
operating the trunk lid. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the
area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and clos-
ing.
90
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Depending on the setting, the
doors may also be unlocked.
Opening with the remote con-
trol, refer to page 81.
Grasp the recess grips and pull
the trunk lid down.
Pull the handle inside the cargo
area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
Depending on the package and
country version, various settings
are available for the remote con-
trol functions.
These settings are stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Doors/Key"
4 "Driver's door" or "All
doors"
5 Select desired setting:
• "Driver's door only"
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid piv-
ots back and up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure
that the area of movement of the
trunk lid is clear during opening
and closing.
Opening and Closing
Opening from the outside
Press and hold the button
on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
Opening from the inside
Press the button in the
storage compartment of
the driver's door.
Closing
Trunk emergency unlocking
Settings
General information
Unlocking
Doors
91
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Only the driver's door and the fuel
filler flap are unlocked. Pressing
again unlocks the entire vehicle.
• "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Depending on the vehicle equip-
ment and country version, this
setting may not be offered.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Doors/Key"
4 "Tailgate" or "Tail-
gate and door(s)"
5 Select desired setting:
• "Tailgate"
The trunk lid is opened.
• "Tailgate and door(s)"
The trunk lid is opened and the
doors are unlocked.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Driver profiles"
3 Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the
driver profile marked with this sym-
bol.
4 "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked,
the driver's seat and exterior
mirrors resume their last set
positions.
The most recent position is inde-
pendent of the positions saved
via the seat memory.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Doors/Key"
4 Deactivate or activate the
desired confirmation signals:
• "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two
flashes, locking by one.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Doors/Key"
4 Select desired setting:
• "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically
after a short period of time if no
door is opened after unlocking.
• "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically
after you drive off.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
Trunk lid
Adjusting the last seat and
mirror position
Confirmation signals from
the vehicle
Automatic locking
Automatic unlocking
92
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
3 "Doors/Key"
4 "Unlock at end of trip"
After drive-ready state is switched
off by pressing the Start/Stop but-
ton, the locked vehicle is automati-
cally unlocked.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Doors/Key"
4 "Fold mirrors in when locked"
The exterior mirrors are automati-
cally folded in during locking.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Doors/Key"
4 "Turn off after door opening"
Opening the front doors establishes
the idle state, refer to page 40.
When the vehicle is locked, the
vehicle alarm system reacts to
the following changes:
• Opening a door, the hood or
the trunk lid.
• Movements in the car's inte-
rior.
• Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.
g., during attempts at stealing
a wheel or when towing the
vehicle.
• Disconnected battery voltage.
• Improper use of the socket for
OBD Onboard Diagnosis.
• Locking the vehicle while a
device is connected to the
socket for the OBD Onboard-
Diagnosis. For socket for the
OBD Onboard Diagnosis,
refer to page 300
The alarm system signals the
following changes visually and
acoustically:
• Acoustic alarm: Depending on
local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
• Visual alarm: By flashing the
exterior lighting.
When you unlock and lock the
vehicle, either with the remote
control or with Comfort entry, the
alarm system is switched off and
on at the same time.
The alarm system is triggered
when a door is opened if the
door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Folding mirrors automati-
cally
Establishing idle state
after opening the front
doors
Alarm system
General information
Switching on/off
Opening the doors with
the alarm system switched
on
93
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Switching off the alarm, refer to
page 94.
The trunk lid can be opened
even when the alarm system is
switched on.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is
locked and monitored again pro-
vided the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes
once.
You can trigger the alarm sys-
tem if you find yourself in a dan-
gerous situation.
To switch off the alarm: press
any button.
• The indicator light flashes
briefly every 2 seconds: The
alarm system is switched on.
• Indicator light flashes for
approx. 10 seconds, then it
flashes briefly every 2 sec-
onds: Interior motion sensor
and tilt alarm sensor are not
active, as doors, hood, or
trunk lid are not correctly
closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points
are closed, interior motion sensor
and tilt alarm sensor will be
switched on.
• The indicator light goes out
after unlocking: The vehicle
has not been tampered with.
• The indicator light flashes
after unlocking until
drive-ready state is switched
on, but no longer than approx.
5 minutes: An alarm has been
triggered.
The tilt of the vehicle is moni-
Opening the trunk lid with
the alarm system switched
on
Panic mode
• Press the button on the
remote control and hold
for at least 3 seconds.
• Briefly press the button
on the remote control
three times in succes-
sion.
Indicator light on the inte-
rior mirror
Tilt alarm sensor
94
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
tored.
The alarm system responds in
situations such as attempts to
steal a wheel or when the vehi-
cle is towed.
The car's interior is monitored to
the height of the seats. The
alarm system is switched on
together with the interior motion
sensor even when the window is
open. Falling objects such as
leaves can trigger the alarm
unintentionally.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior
motion sensor can trigger an
alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an
unwanted alarm:
• In automatic vehicle washes.
• In duplex garages.
• During transport on trains car-
rying vehicles, at sea or on a
trailer.
• With animals in the vehicle.
• When the vehicle is locked
after start of fueling.
The tilt alarm sensor and the
interior motion sensor can be
switched off in such situations.
The indicator light lights up for
approx. 2 seconds and then
continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior
motion sensor are switched off
until the vehicle is locked again.
• Unlock the vehicle with the
remote control.
• Unlock the vehicle using the
remote control, if needed,
through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to
page 82.
• With Smart Key System: if
you are carrying the remote
control on your person, grasp
the driver side or front pas-
senger side door handle com-
pletely.
Interior motion sensor
Avoiding unintentional
alarms
General information
Switching off the tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor
Press the button on the
remote control within 10
seconds as soon as the
vehicle is locked.
Switching off the alarm
95
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The windows can be operated
under the following conditions.
• Standby state is established.
• Drive-ready state is estab-
lished.
• The remote control is in the
car's interior.
• Press the switch to the
resistance point.
The window opens while the switch
is being held.
• Press the switch
beyond the resistance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the
motion.
• Pull the switch to the
resistance point.
The window closes while the switch
is being held.
• Pull the switch beyond
the resistance point.
The window closes automatically if
the door is closed. Pulling again
stops the motion.
If closing force exceeds a spe-
cific threshold as a window
closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Power windows
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows,
body parts and objects can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of move-
ment of the windows is clear
during opening and closing.
Overview
Power windows
Functional requirements
Opening
Closing
Jam protection system
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such
as antennas can impact jam pro-
tection. There is a risk of injury.
Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the win-
dows.
96
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
In case of danger from the out-
side or if ice might prevent nor-
mal closing, proceed as follows:
1 Pull the switch past the
resistance point and hold it
there.
The window closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force
exceeds a specific threshold, clos-
ing is interrupted.
2 Pull the switch past the
resistance point again within
approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without jam pro-
tection.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
An ideal seating position that
meets the needs of the occu-
pants can make a vital contribu-
tion to relaxed, fatigue-free
driving.
In the event of an accident, the
correct seating position plays an
important role. Follow the infor-
mation in the following chapters:
• Seats, refer to page 97.
• Safety belts, refer to page
100.
• Head restraints, refer to page
104.
• Airbags, refer to page 160.
Closing without the jam pro-
tection system
Seats, mirrors, and
steering wheel
Vehicle features and
options
Sitting safely
97
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
1 Backrest angle
2 Height
3 Backrest width
4 Lumbar support
5 Forward/back
6 Seat angle
Pull the lever and apply your
weight to or lift your weight off
the backrest as required.
Seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected move-
ments of the seat. Vehicle control
could be lost. There is a risk of an
accident. Only adjust the seat on
the driver's side when the vehicle
is stationary.
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to
the rear, the efficacy of the safety
belt can no longer be ensured.
There is a risk of sliding under the
safety belt in an accident. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Adjust the seat prior to starting the
trip. Adjust the backrest so that it
is in the most upright position as
possible and do not adjust again
while driving.
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when
moving the seats. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear
prior to any adjustment.
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
Backrest angle
6 5 4 3 2 1
98
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Pull the lever up or press the
lever down repeatedly until the
seat reaches the desired height.
Pull the lever and slide the seat
in the desired direction.
After releasing the lever, move
the seat gently forward or back
to make sure it engages prop-
erly.
Pull the lever up or press the
lever down repeatedly until the
seat reaches the desired angle.
The seat adjustment for the
driver's seat is stored for the
driver profile, refer to page 64,
currently used. When a driver
profile is selected, the stored
position is called up automati-
cally.
The current seat position can be
stored using the memory func-
tion, refer to page 107.
Height
Forward/back
Seat angle
Electrically adjustable
seats
General information
99
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
1 Forward/backward, height,
seat tilt
2 Driver's seat memory
3 Backrest tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
Push switch forward or back-
ward.
Push switch up or down.
Move switch up or down.
Move switch forward or back-
ward.
Overview
Forward/backward
Height
Seat tilt
Backrest tilt
100
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
The curvature of the seat back-
rest can be adjusted in a way
that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower
back and the spine are sup-
ported for upright posture.
Adjusting the backrest width
may improve lateral support
when taking corners.
You can change the backrest
width by adjusting the side
wings of the backrest.
The vehicle is fitted with two
safety belts to ensure occupant
safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted
correctly.
Always make sure that safety
belts are being worn by the
occupants before driving off.
The airbags supplement the
safety belts as an additional
safety device. The airbags are
not a substitute for safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's
anchorage point will be correct
for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly
adjusted.
Lumbar support
Concept
Settings
• Press the front/rear sec-
tion of the button: The
curvature is increased/
decreased.
• Press the upper/lower
section of the button:
The curvature is shifted
up/ down.
Backrest width
Concept
General information
Settings
• Press the front section
of the button: The back-
rest width decreases.
• Press the rear section of
the button: The back-
rest width increases.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and
safety belt buckles
General information
101
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
• Wear the safety belt twist-free
and tight to your body over
your lap and shoulders.
• Wear the safety belt deep on
your hips over your lap. The
safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
• Do not rub the safety belt
against sharp edges, or guide
it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
• Avoid thick clothing.
• Re-tighten the safety belt fre-
quently upward around your
upper body.
Having a correct driving posture
is essential for safe driving.
Maintaining a correct driving
Safety information
WARNING
Use of a safety belt to buckle
more than one person will poten-
tially defeat the ability of the
safety belt to serve its protective
function. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Do not allow
more than one person to wear a
single safety belt. Infants and chil-
dren are not allowed on an occu-
pant's lap, but must be
transported and secured in desig-
nated child restraint systems.
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, includ-
ing safety belts, can be limited or
lost when safety belts are fas-
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause
additional injuries, for instance in
the event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing safety
belts correctly.
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, includ-
ing safety belts, may not be fully
functional or fail in the following
situations:
• The safety belts or safety belt
buckles are damaged, soiled, or
changed in any other way.
• Belt tensioners or belt retractors
were modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly
damaged in the event of an acci-
dent. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not modify
safety belts, safety belt buckles,
belt tensioners, belt retractors or
belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts
checked after an accident at the
your Toyota dealer.
Correct use of safety belts
Correct driving posture
102
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
posture not only helps reduce
fatigue while driving, but helps
ensure that the occupant protec-
tion devices, such as the seat
belts and airbags, will operate
correctly in a collision, reducing
the impact to the occupants.
The most basic occupant pro-
tection device is the seat belt.
The airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts, not
be used in place of them. Wear-
ing the seat belt correctly
ensures that the occupants are
securely held in the seats and
helps prevent them from con-
tacting interior parts or being
thrown from the vehicle in a col-
lision. Therefore, it is necessary
for all occupants to wear their
seat belt. If a seat belt is worn
improperly, its effectiveness as
an occupant protection device
will be severely reduced. Pay
attention to the following to
ensure the correct driving pos-
ture and use of the seat belts.
Position the head restraint so that the center of it is at the same
Correct use of the seat
belts
Correct driving posture and use of the seat belts
A
103
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
height as the top of your ears
Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted
Adjust the seat so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when
gripping the upper part of the steering wheel
Make sure that the seat belt is snug and not loose at any point
Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips
Sit well back in the seat with the seatback upright
Sit so your entire back is in contact with the seatback
Position the shoulder belt so that it does not contact your neck or
slide off your shoulder
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WARNING
Do not recline the seatback
excessively while driving.
To reduce the risk of sliding under
the lap belt during a collision, do
not recline the seat more than
necessary. If the seat is too
reclined, the lap belt may slide
past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or
your neck may contact the shoul-
der belt, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the
event of an accident. Adjustments
should not be made while driving
as the seat may unexpectedly
move and cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
WARNING
Make sure that all passengers
wear their seat belt correctly.
Use of seat belts may be manda-
tory under local laws and regula-
tions. If a seat belt is not worn
properly, an occupant may con-
tact interior parts or be thrown
from the vehicle in the case of
sudden braking or a collision, pos-
sibly resulting in death or serious
injury. Also, if an occupant has an
incorrect riding posture, the
airbags will be ineffectual as
occupant protection devices and
may actually cause injuries when
they deploy.
104
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
1 Guide the safety belt slowly
over shoulder and hip to put it
on.
2 Insert the tongue plate into
the safety belt buckle. The
safety belt buckle must
engage audibly.
1 Hold the safety belt firmly.
2 Press the red button in the
safety belt buckle.
3 Guide the safety belt back
into its roll-up mechanism.
WARNING
Correct use of the seat belts when
pregnant:
Pregnant women must wear a
seat belt. Consult your physician
for advice on correct way to wear
a seat belt. Position the lap belt as
low as possible over the hips and
the shoulder belt completely over
the shoulder, passing the center
of the chest, so that the seat belt
does not apply any pressure to
the abdomen.
Buckling the safety belt
Unbuckling the safety belt
Safety belt reminder for
driver's seat and front pas-
senger seat
Display in the instrument
cluster
The indicator light lights up
and a signal sounds.
Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned cor-
rectly. The safety belt
reminder can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed
on the front passenger
seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint
reduce the protective effect in the
head and neck area. There is a
risk of injury.
• Do not use seat or head
restraint covers.
• Do not hang objects, for
instance clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
105
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The height of the head restraints
cannot be adjusted.
The spacing is adjusted to the
back of the head using the
incline of the backrest.
Adjust the distance so that the
head restraint is as close as
possible to the back of the head.
The head restraints cannot be
removed.
The mirror on the front passen-
ger side is more curved than the
driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for
the driver profile, refer to page
64, currently in use. When a
driver profile is selected, the
stored position is called up auto-
matically.
The current exterior mirror posi-
tion can be stored using the
memory function, refer to page
107.
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic
Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Press the button.
The selected mirror moves
along with the button move-
ment.
WARNING
• Only use accessories that have
been determined to be safe for
attachment to a head restraint.
• Do not use any accessories, for
instance pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
Adjusting the distance
Removing
Exterior mirrors
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are
closer than they appear. The dis-
tance to the traffic behind could
be incorrectly estimated, for
instance while changing lanes.
There is a risk of an accident.
Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your
shoulder.
Overview
Adjusting electrically
106
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
To change over to the
other mirror: Slide the switch.
In case of an electrical malfunc-
tion, adjust the mirror by press-
ing the edges of the mirror
glass.
Press the button.
Folding is only possible up to a
speed of approx. 15 mph/20
km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is
helpful in the following situa-
tions:
• In vehicle washes.
• On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are
folded out automatically at a
speed of approx. 25 mph/40
km/h.
Both exterior mirrors are auto-
matically heated as needed and
when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
The exterior mirror on the
driver's side is automatically
dimmed. Photocells in the car's
interior mirror, refer to page 107,
are used to control this.
If reverse gear is engaged, the
mirror glass on the front passen-
ger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles
when parking, for instance.
1 Slide the switch to the
driver's side mirror position.
2 Engage selector lever posi-
tion R.
Slide the switch to the passen-
ger's side mirror position.
Selecting a mirror
Malfunction
Folding in and out
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width,
the vehicle can be damaged in
vehicle washes. There is a risk of
damage to property. Before wash-
ing, fold in the mirrors by hand or
with the button.
Automatic heating
Automatic dimming fea-
ture
Automatic Curb Monitor,
exterior mirror
Concept
Activating
Deactivating
107
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The interior mirror is dimmed
automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
• In the mirror glass.
• On the back of the mirror.
• Keep the photocells clean.
• Do not cover the area
between the interior mirror
and the windshield.
1 Fold the lever down.
2 Move the steering wheel to
the preferred height and
angle to suit your seating
position.
3 Fold the lever back up.
The following settings can be
stored and, if necessary,
retrieved using the memory
function:
• Seat position.
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature
General information
Overview
Functional requirements
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while
driving can lead to unexpected
steering wheel movements. Vehi-
cle control could be lost. There is
a risk of an accident. Adjust the
steering wheel while the vehicle is
stationary only.
Manual steering wheel
adjustment
Memory function
Concept
108
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
• Exterior mirror position.
• Height of the Head-up Dis-
play.
Two memory locations with dif-
ferent settings can be set for
each driver profile, refer to page
64.
The following settings are not
stored:
• Backrest width.
• Lumbar support.
The memory buttons are located
on the driver's seat.
1 Set the desired position.
2 Press the button. The
writing on the button lights
up.
3 Press desired button 1 or 2
while the LED is lit. A signal
sounds.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The stored position is called up.
The procedure stops when a
switch for setting the seat is
pressed or one of the memory
buttons is pressed again.
While driving, the seat position
adjustment on the driver's side
is interrupted after a short time.
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Using the memory function while
driving can lead to unexpected
seat movements. Vehicle control
could be lost. There is a risk of an
accident. Only retrieve the mem-
ory function when the vehicle is
stationary.
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when
moving the seats. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear
prior to any adjustment.
Overview
Storing
Calling up settings
109
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Press the button
once for each temperature level.
The maximum temperature is
reached when three LEDs are
lit.
Press and hold
the button until the LEDs go out.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Switching off
Transporting children
safely
Vehicle features and
options
When children are in the
vehicle
WARNING
■
When a child is riding
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may result
in death or serious injury.
For effective protection in automo-
bile accidents and sudden stops,
a child must be properly
restrained, using a seat belt or
child restraint system which is
correctly installed. For installation
details, refer to the operation
manual enclosed with the child
restraint system. General installa-
tion instruction is provided in this
manual.
110
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
WARNING
Do not allow occupants to ride
with a child in their arms or on
their lap. In the case of sudden
braking or a collision, the child
may hit their head on the instru-
ment panel or windshield, or may
even be thrown from the vehicle.
The seat belts are designed to
protect persons of average adult
height and weight. A child which
is 150 cm or shorter should be sat
in an appropriately sized child
restraint system, such as a Toyota
genuine child restraint system. Do
not allow a child to be unre-
strained in the vehicle while it is
moving, as doing so is extremely
dangerous.
WARNING
■
When children are in the vehi-
cle
Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, and never allow
children to have or use the
key.Children may be able to start
the vehicle or shift the vehicle into
neutral. There is also a danger
that children may injure them-
selves by playing with the win-
dows or other features of the
vehicle. In addition, heat build-up
or extremely cold temperatures
inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
●
When the vehicle is parked
under direct sunlight, the tem-
perature inside the vehicle can
increase to over 122°F, even in
winter. In this situation, occu-
pants may suffer from dehydra-
tion or heatstroke.
●
If a switch is operated acciden-
tally, it may lead to unexpected
injuries.
●
Do not allow a child to open and
close the doors. When closing a
door, be careful so that the
child’s hands and feet to not get
caught in the door.
●
Do not allow a child to put their
head or limbs out of the door
window and be sure that they
are clear of the window before
operating the power window
switch.
111
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Before using a child restraint
system on the front passenger
seat, ensure that the front, knee,
and side airbags on the front
passenger side are deacti-
vated. Automatic deactivation of
front-seat passenger airbags,
refer to page 170.
Pay attention to the specifica-
tions and the operating and
safety information of the child
restraint system manufacturer
when selecting, installing, and
using child restraint systems.
The right place for chil-
dren
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals
can cause the vehicle to move
and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the fol-
lowing actions:
●
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
●
Releasing the parking brake.
●
Opening and closing the doors
or windows.
●
Engaging selector lever position
N.
●
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or inju-
ries. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle.
Take the remote control with you
when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Children on the front pas-
senger seat
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger
airbags can injure a child in a
child restraint system when the
airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the
front-seat passenger airbags are
deactivated and that the PAS-
SENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
light lights up.
The safety belt cannot be fas-
tened correctly on children shorter
than 5 ft, 150 cm without suitable
additional child restraint systems.
The efficacy of safety gear, includ-
ing safety belts, can be limited or
lost when safety belts are fas-
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause
additional injuries, for instance in
the event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Secure children shorter
than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
child restraint systems.
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
112
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Before installing a child restraint
system in the front passenger
seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the
front passenger side are deacti-
vated.
Deactivate the front-seat pas-
senger airbags automatically,
refer to page 170.
Before installing a child restraint
system, move the front passen-
ger seat as far back as it will go
and, if possible, bring it up to
medium height. This seat posi-
tion and height ensure the best
possible position for the belt and
offers optimal protection in the
event of an accident.
If the upper anchor of the safety
belt is located in front of the belt
guide of the child seat, move the
front passenger seat carefully
Safety information
WARNING
The protective effect of child
restraint systems and their fasten-
ing systems which have been
damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent can be limited or lost. A child
cannot be properly restrained in
the event of an accident or brak-
ing and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Do not use child
restraint systems which have
been damaged or exposed to an
accident. If a child restraint sys-
tem and its fastening system has
been damaged or exposed to an
accident, have these systems
checked and replaced by your
Toyota dealer.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint
system is limited or compromised
with incorrect seat adjustment or
improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the
child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible,
adjust the backrest tilt for all
affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely
engaged or locked. If possible,
adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
On the front passenger
seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger
airbags can injure a child in a
child restraint system when the
airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the
front-seat passenger airbags are
deactivated and that the PAS-
SENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
light lights up.
Seat position and height
113
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
forward until the best possible
belt guide position is reached.
Adjustable backrest width:
before installing a child restraint
system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width
completely. Do not change the
backrest width again and do not
call up a memory position.
The safety belt on the passen-
ger's side can be locked to fas-
ten child restraint systems.
1 Pull out the belt strap com-
pletely.
2 Secure the child restraint
system with the safety belt.
3 Allow the belt strap to be
pulled in and pull it tight
against the child restraint
system. The safety belt is
locked.
1 Unbuckle the safety belt
buckle.
2 Remove the child restraint
system.
3 Allow the belt strap to be
pulled in completely.
Backrest width
Child seat security
Locking the safety belt
Unlocking the safety belt
Child restraint systems
with tether strap
Safety information
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is
incorrectly used for the child
restraint system, the protective
effect can be reduced. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the
upper retaining strap is not guided
across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining
strap.
NOTICE
The anchors for the upper retain-
ing straps of child restraint sys-
tems are only provided for these
retaining straps. When other
objects are mounted, the anchors
can be damaged. There is a risk
of damage to property. Only
mount child restraint systems to
the upper retaining straps.
114
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for the upper retaining
strap
4 Mounting point/eyelet
5 Vehicle floor
6 Seat
7 Upper retaining strap
1 Open the anchor cover.
2 Guide the upper retaining
strap over the head restraint
to the anchor.
3 Attach the hook of the retain-
ing strap to the anchor.
4 Tighten the retaining strap.
Anchors
Symbol Meaning
The respective sym-
bol shows the anchor
for the upper retaining
strap. Seats with an
upper top tether are
marked with this sym-
bol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest
or the rear window
shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
Attaching the upper retain-
ing strap to the anchor
115
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The drive-ready state is
switched on when you depress
the brake pedal while pressing
the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button
again switches drive-ready state
back off and standby state, refer
to page 40, is switched back on.
The Auto Start/Stop function
helps save fuel. The system
switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic con-
gestion or at traffic lights.
Drive-ready state remains
switched on. The engine starts
automatically for driving off.
After each engine start using the
Start/Stop button, the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready. The
function is activated from
speeds of approx. 3 mph/5
km/h.
Depending on the selected driv-
ing mode, refer to page 131, the
system is automatically acti-
vated or deactivated.
The engine is switched off auto-
matically during a stop under the
following conditions:
The selector lever is in selec-
tor lever position D.
The brake pedal remains
pressed while the vehicle is
stationary.
Driving
Vehicle features and
options
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop
button switches
drive-ready state on or
off, refer to page 40.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
General information
Engine stop
Functional requirements
116
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
The driver's safety belt is
buckled or the driver's door is
closed.
If the engine was not switched
off automatically when the vehi-
cle stopped, the engine can be
switched off manually:
Press the brake pedal force-
fully again from the current
pedal position.
Engage selector lever posi-
tion P.
If all functional preconditions are
fulfilled, the engine switches off.
The air flow from the air condi-
tioner is reduced when the
engine is switched off.
■
General information
The engine is not switched off
automatically in the following sit-
uations:
In case of a steep downhill
grade.
Brake not engaged strongly
enough.
The external temperature is
high and automatic air condi-
tioning is running.
The car's interior has not yet
been heated or cooled to the
required level.
Where there is a risk of win-
dow condensation when the
automatic air conditioning is
switched on.
Engine or other parts not at
operating temperature.
Engine cooling is required.
The wheels are at a sharp
angle or the steering wheel is
being turned.
Vehicle battery is heavily dis-
charged.
At higher elevations.
The hood is unlocked.
The parking assistant is acti-
vated.
Stop-and-go traffic.
Selector lever position in N or
R.
After driving in reverse.
Manual engine stop
Air conditioner when the
engine is switched off
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The display in the
tachometer indicates
that the Auto Start/Stop
function is ready for an
Automatic engine start.
The display indicates
that the conditions for
an automatic engine
stop have not been
met.
Functional limitations
117
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Use of fuel with high ethanol
content.
The engine starts automatically
under the following precondi-
tions:
By releasing the brake pedal.
After the engine starts, acceler-
ate as usual.
After the engine switches off
automatically, it will not start
again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
The driver's safety belt is
unbuckled and the driver's
door is open.
The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for
a varied length of time.
The engine can only be started
via the Start/Stop button.
Even if driving off was not
intended, the deactivated
engine starts up automatically in
the following situations:
Excessive warming of the
car's interior when the air con-
ditioning is switched on.
Excessive cooling of the car's
interior when the heating is
switched on.
Where there is a risk of win-
dow condensation when the
automatic air conditioning is
switched on.
The steering wheel is turned.
Change from selector lever
position D to N or R.
Change from selector lever
position P to N, D, or R.
Vehicle battery is heavily dis-
charged.
Start of an oil level measure-
ment.
Depending on the vehicle equip-
ment and country-specific ver-
sion, the vehicle features a
variety of sensors for assessing
the traffic situation. The Intelli-
gent Auto Start/Stop function
uses this information to adapt to
various traffic situations in a pro-
active manner.
For instance, this applies to the
following situations:
If a situation is detected in
which the stopping time is
expected to be very short, the
engine is not switched off
automatically. A message
Starting the engine
Functional requirements
Driving off
Safety mode
System limits
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop
function
118
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
appears on the Control Dis-
play, depending on the situa-
tion.
If a situation is detected in
which the vehicle needs to
drive off immediately, the
engine is started automati-
cally.
The function may be restricted if
the navigation data is invalid,
outdated or not available, for
example.
The engine is not automatically
switched off.
The engine is started during an
automatic engine stop.
Press the button.
The Auto Start/Stop function is
also deactivated in selector
lever position M.
The Auto Start/Stop function is
also deactivated in SPORT driv-
ing mode of the Sport mode
switch.
■
General information
During an automatic engine
stop, the vehicle can be
switched off permanently, for
instance when leaving it.
1 Press the Start/Stop button.
Drive-ready state is switched
off.
Standby state is switched on.
Selector lever position P is
engaged automatically.
2 Set the parking brake.
In certain situations, the Auto
Start/Stop function is deacti-
vated automatically for safety
reasons, for instance if no driver
is detected.
Activating/deactivating the
system manually
Concept
Using the button
Via selector lever position
Via the Sport mode switch
Switching off the vehicle
during an automatic engine
stop
Automatic deactivation
General information
119
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The Auto Start/Stop function no
longer switches off the engine
automatically. A vehicle mes-
sage is displayed. It is possible
to continue driving. Have the
system checked by your Toyota
dealer.
The parking brake is used to
prevent the vehicle from rolling
when it is parked.
Malfunction
Parking brake
Concept
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin
to move and possibly roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle
is secured against rolling away,
follow the following:
●
Set the parking brake.
●
On uphill grades or on a
downhill slope, turn the front
wheels in the direction of the
curb.
●
On uphill grades or on a
downhill slope, also secure the
vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals
can cause the vehicle to move
and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the fol-
lowing actions:
●
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
●
Releasing the parking brake.
●
Opening and closing the doors
or windows.
●
Engaging selector lever position
N.
●
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or inju-
ries. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle.
Take the remote control with you
when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
Parking brake
120
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
■
General information
To use as emergency brake
while driving.
Pull the switch and hold it. The
vehicle brakes hard while the
switch is being pulled.
A vehicle message is displayed.
The parking brake is engaged
when the vehicle is stationary.
1 Switch on drive-ready state.
2 Press the switch while
the brake is pressed or selec-
tor lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
The parking brake is released
automatically when you drive
away.
The LED and indicator light go
out.
In the event of a failure or mal-
function of the parking brake:
Secure the vehicle against roll-
ing away, for instance with a
wheel chock, after existing the
vehicle.
To reestablish parking brake
functionality after a power fail-
ure:
1 Switch on standby state.
2 Pull the switch while
stepping on the brake pedal
or selector lever position P is
set and then push.
This process may take a few
seconds. Any sounds associ-
ated with this are normal.
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light in the
instrument cluster illumi-
nates red. The parking
brake is set.
While driving
The indicator light in the
instrument cluster illumi-
nates red, a signal
sounds, and the brake
lights illuminate.
Releasing
Releasing manually
Automatic release
Malfunction
After a power failure
The indicator light is no
longer illuminated as
soon as the parking
brake is ready for oper-
ation again.
121
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
When driving and during opera-
tion of the turn signals or hazard
warning system, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors, so that the
signal lights on the exterior mir-
ror are easy to see.
Press the lever past the resis-
tance point.
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration
can be adjusted.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Exterior lighting"
4 "One-touch turn signal"
5 Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Press the lever to the resistance
point and hold it there for as
long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Push the lever forward or pull it
backward.
1 High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the
low beams are switched on.
2 High beams off/headlight
flasher, arrow 2.
Do not use the wipers if the
windshield is dry, as this may
damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn
more quickly.
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mir-
ror
Using turn signals
Triple turn signal activa-
tion
Signaling briefly
High beams, headlight
flasher
Washer/wiper system
General information
122
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Press the lever up until the
desired position is reached.
Resting position of the wipers,
position 0.
Rain sensor, position 1.
Normal wiper speed, position
2.
Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with
the wiper system switched on:
when travel continues, the wip-
ers resume at their previous
speed.
Press the lever down.
Switching off: press the lever
down until it reaches its stan-
dard position.
Brief wipe: press the lever
down from the standard posi-
tion.
The lever automatically returns to
its initial position when released.
The rain sensor automatically
controls the time between wipes
depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
The sensor is located on the
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the
folded away state, body parts can
be jammed or damage may occur
to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the vehi-
cle is switched off when the wip-
ers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when
switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the
windshield, the wiper blades can
be torn off and the wiper motor
can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Defrost the windshield prior
to switching the wipers on.
Switching on
Switching off and brief
wipe
Rain sensor
Concept
General information
123
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
windshield, directly in front of
the interior mirror.
Press the lever up once from its
standard position, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is
illuminated.
If wipers are frozen to wind-
shield, wiper operation is deacti-
vated.
Press the lever back into the
standard position.
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust
the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Upward: high rain sensor sensi-
tivity.
Downward: low rains sensor
sensitivity.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the
wipers can accidentally start mov-
ing in vehicle washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Deac-
tivate the rain sensor in vehicle
washes.
Activating
Deactivating
Adjusting the rain sensor
sensitivity
Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto
the window at low temperatures
and obstruct the view. There is a
risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer
fluid cannot freeze. Use washer
fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is
empty, the wash pump cannot
work as intended. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not use
the washer system when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
124
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid
on the windshield and activates
the wipers briefly.
The windshield washer nozzles
are automatically heated while
standby state is switched on.
The fold-out position enables
the wipers to be folded away
from the windshield.
Important, for instance when
changing the wiper blades or
when folding out under frosty
conditions.
1 Switch on standby state.
2 Press and hold the wiper
level down, until the wipers
stop in a close to vertical
position.
Cleaning the windshield
Windshield washer nozzles
Fold-away position of the
wipers
Concept
General information
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the
folded away state, body parts can
be jammed or damage may occur
to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the vehi-
cle is switched off when the wip-
ers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when
switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the
windshield, the wiper blades can
be torn off and the wiper motor
can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Defrost the windshield prior
to switching the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers
125
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
3 Fold the wipers all the way
away from the windshield.
After the wipers are folded back
down, the wiper system must be
reactivated.
1 Fold the wipers back down
onto the windshield.
2 Switch on standby state and
press and hold the wiper
lever down again.
3 Wipers return to their resting
position and are ready again
for operation.
The Automatic transmission
combines the functions of man-
ual shifting, if needed.
Selector lever position for nor-
mal vehicle operation. All gears
for forward travel are activated
automatically.
Engage selector lever position R
only when the vehicle is station-
ary.
The vehicle may be pushed or
roll without power, for instance
in vehicle washes, refer to page
127, in selector lever position N.
Selector lever position, for
instance for parking the vehicle.
The transmission blocks the
drive wheels in selector lever
position P.
Engage selector lever position P
only when the vehicle is station-
Folding down the wipers
Automatic transmission
Concept
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin
to move and possibly roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling, for instance with
the parking brake.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Reverse R
Neutral N
Parking position P
126
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
ary.
■
P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P is
engaged automatically in situa-
tions such as the following:
After the drive-ready state is
switched off and selector
lever position R, D or M is
engaged.
After the standby state has
been switched off when selec-
tor lever position N is
engaged.
If the driver's safety belt is
unbuckled, the driver's door is
opened, and the brake pedal
is not pressed while the vehi-
cle is stationary and selector
lever position D, M or R is
engaged.
To prevent the vehicle from
creeping after you select a drive
mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready
to start.
Only when the drive-ready state
is switched on and the brake
pedal is depressed is it possible
to change from selector lever
position P to another selector
lever position.
The selection lever position P
cannot be changed until all tech-
nical requirements are met.
A selector lever lock prevents
the following faulty operation:
Unintentional shifting into
selector lever position R.
Unintentional shifting from
selector lever position P into
another selector lever posi-
tion.
1 Fasten driver's safety belt.
2 Press and hold the button to
release the selector lever
lock.
3 Push the selector lever in the
desired direction, past a
resistance point, if needed.
The selector lever automati-
Engaging selector lever
positions
General information
Functional requirements
Engaging selector lever
position D, N, R
127
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
cally returns to the center
position when released.
Press button P.
In some situations, the vehicle is
to roll without its own power for
a short distance, for instance in
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
1 Switch on drive-ready state
while pressing on the brake
pedal.
2 If necessary, release the
parking brake.
3 Depress the brake pedal.
4 Touch the selector lever lock
and engage selector lever
position N.
5 Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains
switched on, and a vehicle mes-
sage is displayed.
The vehicle may roll.
Irrespective of standby state, the
selector lever position P is auto-
matically engaged after approx.
35 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you
may not be able to change the
selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the trans-
mission lock, if needed, refer to
page 129.
Kickdown is used to achieve
maximum driving performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at
the full throttle position.
Engaging selector lever
position P
Rolling or pushing the
vehicle
General information
Engaging selector lever
position N
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is auto-
matically engaged when standby
state is switched off. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle
washes.
Kickdown
128
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Manual gear-shifting is possible
in manual mode.
Press the selector lever to the
left out of selector lever position
D.
The engaged gear is displayed
in the instrument cluster, for
instance 1M.
To shift down: press the
selector lever forward.
To shift up: pull the selector
lever rearwards.
Push the selector lever to the
right.
D is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
The shift paddles on the steer-
ing wheel allow you to shift
gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
■
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suit-
able engine and road speeds.
■
Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D,
actuating a shift paddle switches
into manual mode temporarily.
After conservative driving in
manual mode without accelera-
tion or shifting via the shift pad-
dles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches
back to automatic mode.
It is possible to switch into auto-
matic mode as follows:
Pull and hold right shift pad-
dle.
In addition to the briefly pulled
right shift paddle, briefly pull
the left shift paddle.
■
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position M,
actuating a shift paddle switches
into manual mode permanently.
Manual mode
Concept
Activating manual mode
Shifting
Ending the manual mode
Shift paddles
Concept
General information
129
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
To shift up: briefly pull right
shift paddle.
To shift down: briefly pull left
shift paddle.
The lowest possible gear can
be selected by pulling and
holding the left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly dis-
played in the instrument cluster,
followed by the current gear.
Electronically unlock the trans-
mission lock to maneuver vehi-
cle from a danger area.
Unlocking is possible, if the
starter can spin the engine.
Before unlocking the transmis-
sion lock, set the parking brake
to prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing away.
1 Press and hold down brake
pedal.
2 Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter must audibly
start. Hold the Start/Stop but-
ton pressed.
3 With your free hand, press
the button on the selector
lever, arrow 1, and press the
selector lever into selector
lever position N and hold,
arrow N, until selector lever
position N is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
A vehicle message is displayed.
4 Release Start/Stop button
and selector lever.
5 Release brake, as soon as
the starter stops.
Shifting
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The selector lever posi-
tion is displayed, for
example P.
Electronic unlocking of
the transmission lock
General information
Engaging selector lever
position N
1
R
N
130
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
6 Maneuver the vehicle from
the danger area and secure it
against moving on its own.
For additional information, see
the chapter on tow-starting and
towing, refer to page 316.
Launch Control enables opti-
mum acceleration on surfaces
with good traction under dry sur-
rounding conditions.
The use of Launch Control
causes premature component
wear since this function rep-
resents a very heavy load for
the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control
during the break-in, refer to
page 250, period.
Do not steer the steering wheel
when driving off with Launch
Control.
Launch Control is available
when the engine is at operating
temperature. The engine is at
operating temperature after an
uninterrupted trip of at least 6
miles/10 km.
1 Switch on drive-ready state.
2 Press the sport button.
SPORT will be displayed on the
instrument cluster, indicating sport
mode has been selected.
3 Press the button.
TRACTION will be displayed on the
instrument cluster and the VSC
OFF indicator lamp will illuminate.
4 Select the D selector lever
position.
5 Firmly depress the brake
pedal with your left foot.
6 Fully depress and hold the
accelerator pedal at the kick-
down position.
A flag symbol will be shown in the
instrument cluster.
7 The engine speed will be
adjusted for launching.
Release the brake pedal
within 3 seconds.
After Launch Control has been
used, the transmission must
cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be
used again. Launch Control
adjusts to the surrounding con-
ditions, when used again.
To increase vehicle stability,
activate VSC Vehicle Stability
Launch Control
Concept
General information
Functional requirements
Start with launch control
Repeated use during a trip
After using Launch Control
131
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Control System again as soon
as possible.
An experienced driver may be
able to achieve better accelera-
tion values in VSC OFF mode.
The Sport mode button influ-
ences the driving dynamics
properties of the vehicle.
The following systems are
affected, for instance:
Engine characteristics.
Automatic transmission.
Adaptive variable suspension.
Steering.
Display in the instrument clus-
ter.
Cruise control.
When drive-ready state is
switched on, the NORMAL driv-
ing mode is selected automati-
cally.
System limits
Sport mode button
Concept
General information
Overview
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The selected driving
mode is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Driving modes
Button in the vehicle
Button
Driving
mode
Configu-
ration
SPORT SPORT
Custom-
ize
132
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
■
Concept
Balanced tuning between
dynamic and efficient driving.
■
Concept
Dynamic tuning for higher agility
with an optimized chassis and
suspension.
■
Switching on
■
Concept
Customize settings can be
adjusted in the customize driv-
ing mode.
■
Configuration
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Configure SPORT INDIVID-
UAL"
4 Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Reset Customize to the stan-
dard settings:
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The instrument cluster is a vari-
able display. When the sport
mode switch is used to change
the driving mode, the instrument
cluster displays change to
match the driving mode.
The display change in the instru-
ment cluster can be deactivated
via Toyota Supra Command.
Some of the displays in the
instrument cluster may differ
from the illustrations in this
Owner's Manual.
Driving modes in detail
NORMAL
SPORT
Press the button.
Customize
Displays
Vehicle features and
options
Instrument cluster
Concept
General information
133
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
1 Fuel gauge P.138
2 Speedometer
3 Tachometer P.139
Status, Sport mode switch
P.131
4 Time P.59
5 Variable displays P.133
6 External temperature P.140
7 Engine coolant temperature
P.140
8 Vehicle messages P.133
Range P.140
9 Transmission display P.125
10Variable displays P.133
Speed Limit Info P.142
In some areas of the instrument
cluster, various assistance sys-
tems, for example the cruise
control, can be displayed. The
displays may vary depending on
the equipment version and
country variant.
The display can be changed for
sport mode.
The driving mode will change to
sport mode.
The vehicle messages system
monitors functions in the vehicle
and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A vehicle messages message is
displayed as a combination of
indicator or warning lights and
SMS text messages in the
instrument cluster and, if appli-
cable, in the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal
may sound and an SMS text
message may appear on the
Control Display.
Overview
Variable displays
Sport mode display
Concept
Changing the display
Push the sport mode
switch until SPORT is
displayed.
Vehicle messages
Concept
General information
134
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Press and hold the button on the
turn signal lever.
Some vehicle messages are
displayed continuously and are
not cleared until the malfunction
is eliminated. If several malfunc-
tions occur at once, the mes-
sages are displayed
consecutively.
The messages can be hidden
for approx. 8 seconds. After this
time, they are displayed again
automatically.
Some vehicle messages are
hidden automatically after
approx. 20 seconds. The vehicle
messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Vehicle status"
3 "vehicle messages"
4 Select the SMS text mes-
sage.
SMS text messages in combina-
tion with a symbol in the instru-
ment cluster explain a vehicle
message and the meaning of
the indicator/warning lights.
Additional information, such as
the reason for an error or mal-
function or the required action,
can be called up via vehicle
messages.
With urgent messages the
added text will be automatically
displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
Depending on the vehicle mes-
sage, further help can be
selected.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
Hiding vehicle messages
Continuous display
Temporary display
Displaying stored vehicle
messages
Display
Vehicle messages
At least one vehicle
messages message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
Supplementary SMS text
messages
135
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
2 "Vehicle status"
3 "Vehicle messages"
4 Select the desired text mes-
sage.
5 Select desired setting
Special messages displayed
while driving are displayed
again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
Indicator/warning lights in the
instrument cluster display the
status of some functions in the
vehicle and indicate when a
malfunction is present in the
monitored systems.
The indicator/warning lights can
light up in a variety of combina-
tions and colors.
Several of the lights are
checked for proper functioning
and light up temporarily when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Messages after trip comple-
tion
Indicator/warning lights
Concept
General information
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator light flashes or
is illuminated: safety
belt on the driver or
passenger side is not
buckled. The safety belt
reminder can also be
activated if objects are
placed on the front pas-
senger seat.
Make sure that the
safety belts are posi-
tioned correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt
tensioner are not work-
ing.
Have the vehicle
checked immediately
by your Toyota dealer.
Parking brake
The parking brake is
set.
Release the parking
brake, refer to page
120.
136
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Brake system
Braking system
impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle
checked immediately
by your Toyota dealer.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
Braking force boost
may not be working.
Avoid abrupt braking.
Take the longer brak-
ing distance into
account.
Have the system imme-
diately checked by your
Toyota dealer.
VSC Vehicle Stability Con-
trol System
The indicator light
flashes: VSC controls
the drive and braking
forces. The vehicle is
stabilized. Reduce
speed and modify your
driving style to the driv-
ing circumstances.
The indicator light lights
up: VSC has malfunc-
tioned.
Have the system imme-
diately checked by a
dealer’s service center
or another qualified ser-
vice center or repair
shop.
VSC, refer to page 196.
VSC Vehicle Stability Con-
trol System is deactivated or
Traction mode is activated
VSC is deactivated or
Traction mode is acti-
vated.
VSC, refer to page 196,
and Traction mode,
refer to page 198.
137
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights
up: the Tire Pressure
Monitor reports a low
tire inflation pressure or
a flat tire. Follow the
information in the vehi-
cle message.
The indicator light
flashes and then con-
tinuously lights up: no
flat tire or loss of tire
inflation pressure can
be detected.
Interference caused
by systems or
devices with the
same radio fre-
quency: after leaving
the area of the inter-
ference, the system
automatically
becomes active
again.
A wheel without TPM
wheel electronics is
mounted: have it
checked by your
Toyota dealer as
needed.
Malfunction: have the
system checked by
your Toyota dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 278.
Steering system
Steering system may
not be working.
Have the system
checked by your Toyota
dealer.
Emissions
The warning light
lights up:
Emissions are deterio-
rating. Have the vehi-
cle checked as soon
as possible.
The warning light
flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that
there is excessive mis-
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle
speed and have the
system checked imme-
diately; otherwise, seri-
ous engine misfiring
within a brief period
can seriously damage
emission control com-
ponents, in particular
the catalytic converter.
Socket for Onboard
Diagnosis, refer to page
300.
138
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
The current fill level of the fuel
tank is displayed.
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Information on refueling, refer to
page 260.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched
on.
Unusually rapid flash-
ing of the indicator light
indicates that a turn sig-
nal bulb has failed.
Turn signal, refer to
page 121.
Parking lights
Parking lights are
switched on.
Parking lights/low
beams, refer to page
153.
Low beams
Low beams are
switched on.
Parking lights/low
beams, refer to page
153.
Lane departure warning
The indicator light lights
up: the system is acti-
vated. A lane marking
was detected on at
least one side of the
vehicle and warnings
can be issued.
Lane departure warn-
ing, refer to page 184.
Automatic high-beam
Automatic high-beam is
switched on.
High beams are
switched on and off
automatically depend-
ing on the traffic situa-
tion.
Automatic high-beam,
refer to page 155.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are
switched on.
High beams, refer to
page 121.
Fuel gauge
Concept
General information
139
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Always avoid engine speeds in
the red warning field. In this
range, the fuel supply is reduced
to protect the engine.
Depending on the vehicle equip-
ment, the shift position indica-
tors on the tachometer indicate
the maximum shift point at
which the best possible acceler-
ation can be achieved.
When the selected driving mode
is sport mode, a shift light will be
displayed.
1 Select SPORT using the
sport mode switch.
2 Activate manual mode of the
transmission.
• Successive orange illumi-
nated fields indicate the
upcoming shift moment.
• The field lights up red. Do not
wait any further to shift.
When the maximum speed is
reached, the entire display
flashes red and the supply of
fuel is interrupted in order to
protect the engine.
Display
An arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol
shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Indicator light In the
instrument cluster
The yellow indicator
light illuminates, once
the fuel reserve is
reached.
Tachometer
Shift lights
Concept
Functional requirement
Switching on shift lights
Display
Standby state and
drive-ready state
The letters OFF in the
tachometer indicate
that drive-ready state is
switched off and
standby state is
switched on.
140
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
For further information, see Idle
state, standby state, and
drive-ready state, refer to page
40.
If the indicator drops to
+37°F/+3°C or lower, a signal
sounds.
A vehicle message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice
on roads.
The time is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Setting the
time and time format, refer to
page 59.
The range indicates the dis-
The letters READY in
the tachometer indicate
that the Auto Start/Stop
function is ready to
start the engine auto-
matically.
Engine coolant tempera-
ture
Display
When the engine
temperature is low:
Only the segments in
the low temperature
range will be illumi-
nated. Drive with
moderate engine
speed and vehicle
speed.
When the engine
temperature is nor-
mal: All segments to
the middle tempera-
ture range will be illu-
minated.
When the engine
temperature is high:
All segments to the
high temperature
range will be illumi-
nated. A warning
message will also be
displayed.
Check the coolant
level, refer to page 297.
Indicator light In the
instrument cluster
A red indicator light is
displayed.
External temperature
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Even at temperatures above
+37°F/+3°C there can be a risk of
icy roads, for instance on bridges
or shady sections of road. There
is a risk of an accident. Modify
your driving style to the weather
conditions at low temperatures.
Time
Range
Concept
141
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
tance that can still be covered
with the current fuel level.
The estimated range available
with the remaining fuel is perma-
nently displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
With a low remaining range, a
vehicle message is briefly dis-
played. With a dynamic driving
style, for instance taking curves
aggressively, the engine func-
tion is not always ensured.
The vehicle message appears
continuously below a range of
approx. 30 miles/50 km.
The function displays the ser-
vice requirements and the corre-
sponding maintenance scopes.
After switching on drive-ready
state, the instrument cluster
briefly displays available driving
distance or time to the next
scheduled maintenance.
More information on the type of
service required may be dis-
played on the Control Display.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Vehicle status"
3 "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures
and legally mandated inspections
are displayed.
4 Select an entry to call up
detailed information.
General information
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may
no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Refuel promptly.
Service requirements
Concept
General information
Display
Detailed information on ser-
vice requirements
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently
required.
The deadline for sched-
uled maintenance or a
legally mandated
inspection is approach-
ing.
The service deadline
has already passed.
142
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Enter the dates for the manda-
tory vehicle inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's
date and time are set correctly.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Vehicle status"
3 "Service required"
4 "Date:"
5 Select the desired setting.
The system recommends the
most efficient gear for the cur-
rent driving situation.
Depending on the design and
country version, the gear shift
indicator may be active in the
manual mode of the automatic
transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or
down are displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift
indicator, the engaged gear is
displayed.
Speed Limit Info shows the cur-
rently valid maximum permitted
speed in the instrument cluster
and the Head-up Display.
The camera in the area of the
interior mirror detects traffic
signs at the edge of the road as
well as variable overhead sign
posts.
Traffic signs with extra symbols
are considered and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be
either displayed or ignored
depending on the situation in the
instrument cluster and the
Head-up Display.
The system takes into account
any information that is stored in
the navigation system and also
displays speed limits present on
routes without signs.
Entering appointment dates
Gear shift indicator
Concept
General information
Displaying
Example Description
Efficient gear is set.
Shift into efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
General information
143
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The camera is installed near the
interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of
the interior mirror clean and
clear.
Depending on the vehicle equip-
ment, Speed Limit Info is dis-
played permanently in the
instrument cluster or via Toyota
Supra Command.
1 "My vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Displays"
4 "Instrument panel"
5 "Road signs"
If the detected speed limit has
been exceeded, the indicator
light will flash.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Displays"
4 "Instrument panel"
5 Select desired setting:
"Warn when speeding": acti-
vating/deactivating the flash-
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style
to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Camera
Displaying Speed Limit
Info
General information
Display via Toyota Supra
Command
Display
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Speed Limit Info not
available.
Settings
144
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
ing of the Speed Limit Info
display in the instrument clus-
ter and Head-up Display
when the currently valid
speed limit is exceeded.
"Excess speed display": the
speed limit that is detected by
the Speed Limit Info is dis-
played with a marking in the
speedometer in the instru-
ment cluster.
The system may not be fully
functional and may provide
incorrect information in the fol-
lowing situations:
In heavy fog, wet conditions,
or snowfall.
When signs are fully or par-
tially concealed by objects,
stickers or paint.
When driving very close to the
vehicle in front of you.
When driving toward bright
lights or strong reflections.
When the windshield in front
of the interior mirror is fogged
over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
If the camera has overheated
and been temporarily
switched off due to exces-
sively high temperatures.
In the event of incorrect
detection by the camera.
If the speed limits or road data
stored in the navigation sys-
tem are incorrect.
If the speed limits vary with
the time of day and the day of
the week.
In areas not covered by the
navigation system.
When roads differ from the
navigation, such as due to
changes in road routing.
In case of electronic traffic
signs.
When passing buses or trucks
with traffic signs applied to
them.
If the traffic signs are
non-conforming.
When signs that are valid for
a parallel road are detected.
In the presence of coun-
try-specific signs and road
configurations.
During calibration of the cam-
era immediately after vehicle
delivery.
The display can be operated
when necessary.
Entertainment source.
Current audio source.
List of most recent telephone
calls.
System limits
Selection lists
Concept
145
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
If necessary, the corresponding
menu will open on the Control
Display.
Items displayed may differ
depending on the specifications
of the vehicle.
The Onboard Computer dis-
plays different vehicle data in
the instrument cluster, such as
average values.
Press and hold the button on the
turn signal lever.
Information is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Pressing the
button repeatedly displays addi-
tional information.
The following information can be
displayed on the Onboard Com-
puter:
Miles and trip miles.
Current drivable range.
Consumption display.
Average consumption and
average speed.
For some information of the
Onboard Computer, it is possi-
ble to set whether it can be
called up in the instrument clus-
ter.
Display
Displaying and using the
list
Button Function
Change the entertain-
ment source.
Pressing the button
again will close the cur-
rently displayed list.
Show list of most
recent telephone calls.
Turn the thumbwheel
to select the desired
setting.
Press the thumbwheel
to confirm the setting.
The currently selected
list can be displayed
again in the instrument
cluster by turning the
thumbwheel.
Onboard Computer in the
instrument cluster
Concept
Calling up information
Information at a glance
Adjusting information for
Onboard Computer
146
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Displays"
4 "Instrument panel"
5 "Onboard info"
6 Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
■
Displaying/resetting miles
■
Display
■
Concept
The range indicates the dis-
tance that can still be covered
with the current fuel level.
■
General information
The estimated range available
with the remaining fuel is perma-
nently displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
With a low remaining range, a
vehicle message is briefly dis-
played. With a dynamic driving
style, for instance taking curves
aggressively, the engine func-
tion is not always ensured.
The vehicle message appears
continuously below a range of
approx. 30 miles/50 km.
■
Safety information
■
Display
■
Concept
The current consumption dis-
Information in detail
Odometer and trip odometer
• Press the knob to dis-
play the trip miles.
When the drive-ready
state is switched off,
miles and trip miles are
displayed.
• Keep the knob
pressed down to
reset the trip miles.
Current drivable range
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may
no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Refuel promptly.
Consumption display
147
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
plays the current consumption
of fuel. Check whether you are
currently driving in an efficient
and environmentally friendly
manner.
■
General information
The current fuel consumption is
displayed on the instrument
cluster as a bar display.
■
Display
■
General information
Average speed and average
consumption are calculated for
the distance traveled since the
last reset in the Onboard Com-
puter.
Periods in which the vehicle is
parked with the engine manually
stopped are not included in the
calculation of the average
speed.
■
Resetting average values
Press and hold the button on the
turn signal lever.
■
Display
The Onboard Computer dis-
plays different vehicle data on
the Control Display, such as
average values.
Two types of Onboard Com-
puter are available on the Con-
trol Display:
"Onboard info": average val-
ues, such as the consump-
Average speed and average
consumption
Onboard Computer on the
Control Display
Concept
General information
148
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
tion, are displayed. The
values can be reset individu-
ally.
"Trip computer": the values
deliver an overview of a cer-
tain distance and can be reset
as often as necessary.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Driving information"
3 "Onboard info" or "Trip com-
puter"
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Driving information"
3 "Onboard info"
4 "Consumption" or "Speed"
5 "OK"
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Driving information"
3 "Trip computer"
4 Move the Controller to the
left, if needed.
• "Reset": all values are
reset.
• "Automatic reset": all val-
ues are reset approx. 4 hours
after the vehicle has come to
a standhill.
5 If necessary, "OK"
Depending on the vehicle speci-
fications, the current power out-
put and torque can be displayed
on the control display.
The following information is dis-
played:
Torque.
Power.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Sport displays"
A speed limit can be set that
when reached will cause a
Calling up the Onboard
Computer or trip computer
Resetting the Onboard
computer
Resetting the trip com-
puter
Sport displays
Concept
Display on the Control Dis-
play
Overview
Displays
Speed warning
Concept
149
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the
vehicle speed exceeds the set
speed limit again, after it has
dropped below it by 3 mph/5
km/h.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Speed warning"
4 "Warning at:"
5 Turn the Controller until the
desired speed is displayed.
6 Press the Controller.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Speed warning"
4 "Speed warning"
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Speed warning"
4 "Select current speed"
The status can be displayed and
actions performed for several
systems.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Vehicle status"
"Tire Pressure Monitor":
Status of the Tire Pressure
Monitor, refer to page 278.
"Engine oil level": Elec-
tronic engine oil level check,
refer to page 293.
"vehicle messages": Vehi-
cle messages are stored in
the background and can be
displayed on the Control Dis-
play. Displaying stored vehi-
cle messages, refer to page
134.
"Service required": Dis-
playing service requirements,
refer to page 141.
"Remote maintenance
Call": service request.
General information
Configuring the speed
limit warning
Activating/deactivating the
speed warning
Setting your current speed
as the speed warning
Vehicle status
General information
Opening the vehicle status
Information at a glance
150
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
This system projects important
information into the driver's field
of vision, for instance the speed.
The driver can get information
without averting his or her eyes
from the road.
Read the information for clean-
ing the Head-up Display, refer to
page 325.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Displays"
4 "Head-up display"
5 "Head-up display"
The following information is dis-
played on the Head-up Display:
Speed.
Navigation instructions.
Vehicle messages.
Selection list in the instrument
cluster.
Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only
displayed briefly as needed.
Various views are available for
the Head-up Display.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Displays"
4 "Head-up display"
5 Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
The brightness is automatically
adjusted to the ambient bright-
ness.
The basic setting can be
adjusted manually.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
Head-up Display
Concept
General information
Overview
Switching on/off
Display
Overview
Selecting the view
Setting the brightness
151
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
1 "My vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Displays"
4 "Head-up display"
5 "Brightness"
6 Turn the Controller until the
desired brightness is set.
7 Press the Controller.
When the low beams are
switched on, the brightness of
the Head-up Display can be
additionally influenced using the
instrument lighting.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Displays"
4 "Head-up display"
5 "Height"
6 Turn the Controller until the
desired height is reached.
7 Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
The height of the Head-up Dis-
play can also be stored using
the memory function, refer to
page 107.
The Head-up Display view can
be rotated.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "System settings"
3 "Displays"
4 "Head-up display"
5 "Rotation"
6 Turn the Controller until the
desired setting is selected.
7 Press the Controller.
The visibility of the displays in
the Head-up Display is influ-
enced by the following factors:
Seat position.
Objects on the cover of the
Head-up Display.
Sunglasses with certain polar-
ization filters.
Wet roads.
Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have
the basic settings checked by
your Toyota dealer.
The windshield is part of the
system.
The shape of the windshield
makes it possible to display a
precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents
double images from being gen-
erated.
Adjusting the height
Setting the rotation
Visibility of the display
Special windshield
152
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
For this reason, it is strongly
suggested to have the special
windshield replaced by your
Toyota dealer if necessary.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The light switch element is
located next to the steering
wheel.
Lights
Vehicle features and
options
Lights and lighting
Switches in the vehicle
153
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The low beams are switched on
and off automatically depending
on the ambient brightness, for
instance in tunnels, in twilight or
if there is precipitation.
A blue sky with the sun low on
the horizon can cause the lights
to be switched on.
If the low beams are switched
on manually, the automatic
headlight control is deactivated.
The LED in the button lights up.
The automatic headlight control
cannot serve as a substitute for
your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are
unable to detect fog or hazy
weather. In these situations,
switch the light on manually.
If the driver's door is opened
when the drive-ready state is
switched off, the exterior lighting
is automatically switched off.
Symbol Function
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight
control.
Adaptive light functions.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking
light.
Left roadside parking
light.
Automatic headlight con-
trol
Concept
General information
Activating
Press the button on the
light switch element.
The indicator light in the
instrument cluster is
illuminated when the
low beams are
switched on.
System limits
Parking lights, low beams
and roadside parking
lights
General information
154
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
The parking lights can only be
switched on in the low speed
range.
The vehicle is illuminated on all
sides.
Do not use the parking lights for
extended periods; otherwise,
they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to
switch on drive-ready state.
After the drive-ready state is
switched on, the automatic
headlight control will be acti-
vated.
The low beams illuminate when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Press the button again to switch
on the low beams when the
standby state is switched on.
Depending on the country vari-
ant, the low beams can be
switched off in the low speed
range.
When the vehicle is parked, a
one-sided roadside parking light
can be switched on.
Parking lights
General information
Switching on
Press the button on the
light switch element.
The indicator light in the
instrument cluster lights
up.
Switching off
Press the button on the
light switch element or
switch on the
drive-ready state.
Low beams
Switching on
Press the button on the
light switch element.
The indicator light in the
instrument cluster lights
up.
Switching off
Press the button on the
light switch element.
Roadside parking lights
Button Function
Right roadside
parking light
on/off.
Left roadside
parking light
on/off.
155
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Depending on the equipment,
the exterior lighting of the vehi-
cle can be set individually.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Exterior lighting"
4 Select desired setting:
"Welcome lights"
When unlocking the vehicle, indi-
vidual light functions are switched
on for a limited time.
The low beams stay lit for a par-
ticular time if the high beams are
switched on after standby state
is switched on.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Exterior lighting"
4 "Pathway lighting"
5 Select the desired setting.
The daytime running lights light
up when drive-ready state is
switched on.
In some countries, daytime run-
ning lights are mandatory, so it
may not be possible to deacti-
vate the daytime running lights.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Exterior lighting"
4 "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
The Automatic high-beam
detects other traffic participants
early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or
off depending on the traffic situ-
ation.
The Automatic high-beam
Welcome lights
General information
Activating/deactivating
Headlight courtesy delay
feature
General information
Setting the duration
Daytime running lights
General information
Activating/deactivating
Automatic high-beam
Concept
General information
156
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
ensures that the high beams are
switched on, whenever the traf-
fic situation allows. In the low
speed range, the high beams
are not switched on by the sys-
tem.
The system responds to light
from oncoming traffic and traffic
driving ahead of you, and to
ambient lighting, for instance in
towns and cities.
The high beams can be
switched on and off manually at
any time.
1 Press the button on the
light switch element.
The LED in the button lights up.
2 Press and hold the button on
the turn signal lever.
The headlights are automatically
switched between low beams
and high beams.
Driving interruption with acti-
vated Automatic high-beam: the
Automatic high-beam remains
activated when driving contin-
ues.
The Automatic high-beam is
deactivated when manually
switching the high beams on
and off, refer to page 121.
To reactivate the Automatic
high-beam, press the button on
the turn signal lever.
Press and hold the button on the
turn signal lever.
The sensitivity of the Automatic
high-beam can be adjusted.
Activating
The indicator light in the
instrument cluster is
illuminated when the
low beams are
switched on.
The blue indicator light
in the instrument clus-
ter lights up when the
system switches on the
high beams.
Deactivating
Sensitivity of the Auto-
matic high-beam
General information
157
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The setting can only be per-
formed when the vhicle is sta-
tionary. The drive-ready state
must be switched on and the
light must be turned off.
Pull the turn signal lever for
approximately 10 seconds. The
system responds more sensi-
tively.
A vehicle message is displayed.
Pull the turn signal lever again
for approx. 10 seconds. The
sensitivity of the Automatic
high-beam is reset to the factory
settings.
The Automatic high-beam can-
not serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. In
situation that require this, there-
fore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional
in the following situations, and
driver intervention may be nec-
essary:
In very unfavorable weather
conditions, such as fog or
heavy precipitation.
When detecting poorly-lit road
users such as pedestrians,
cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to
train or ship traffic; or at ani-
mal crossings.
In tight curves, on hilltops or
in depressions, in cross traf-
fic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
In poorly-lit towns and cities
or in the presence of highly
reflective signs.
When the windshield in front
of the interior mirror is fogged
over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
WARNING
If adjustments have been made or
the sensitivity has been modified,
oncoming traffic may be momen-
tarily blinded. There is a risk of an
accident. If adjustments have
been made and the sensitivity has
been modified, make sure that
oncoming traffic is not momentar-
ily blinded. Switch off the high
beams manually if required.
Functional requirements
Adjusting the sensitivity
Resetting the sensitivity
System limits
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
158
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Depending on the equipment
version, interior lights, footwell
lights and door entry lighting are
automatically controlled.
To switch off permanently: press
the button and hold for approx. 3
seconds.
Settings
Adjust the brightness
with the thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Interior lights
Reading lights
Switching the interior
lights on/off
Press the button.
Switching the reading
lights on/off
Press the button.
159
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Safety
Vehicle features and
options
160
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
1 Knee airbag
2 Front airbag, driver
3 Front airbag, front passenger
4 Curtain shield airbag
5 Side airbag
Front airbags help protect the
driver and the front passenger
by responding to frontal impacts
in which safety belts alone
would not provide adequate pro-
tection.
In a lateral impact, the side
airbag supports the side of the
body in the chest, lap, and head
area.
The knee airbag supports the
legs in a frontal impact.
The curtain shield airbag sup-
ports the head in the event of a
side-on crash.
Airbags
Front airbags
Side airbag
Knee airbag
Curtain shield airbag
161
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Airbags are not triggered in
every impact situation, for
instance in less severe acci-
dents or rear end collisions.
Keep a distance from the
airbags.
Always grasp the steering
wheel on the steering wheel
rim. Hold your hands at the 3
o'clock and 9 o'clock posi-
tions, to keep the risk of injury
to your hands or arms as low
as possible when the airbag is
triggered.
Make sure that the front pas-
senger is sitting correctly, i.e.,
keeps his or her feet and legs
in the floor area and does not
support them on the dash-
board.
Make sure that occupants
keep their heads away from
the side airbag.
There should be no addi-
tional persons, animals or
objects between an airbag
and a person.
Dashboard and windshield on
the front passenger side must
stay clear - do not attach
adhesive labels or coverings
and do not attach brackets or
cables, for instance for GPS
devices or mobile phones.
Do not apply adhesive materi-
als to the airbag cover panels,
do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
Do not use the cover of the
front airbag on the front pas-
senger side as a storage
area.
Do not attach slip covers, seat
cushions or other objects to
the front passenger seat that
are not specifically suited for
seats with integrated side
airbags.
Do not hang pieces of cloth-
ing, such as jackets, over the
backrests.
Never modify either the indi-
vidual components or the wir-
ing in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel
covers, the dashboard, and
the seats.
Do not remove the airbag sys-
tem.
Protective effect
General information
Information on optimum
effect of the airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or
the deployment area of the
airbags is impaired, the airbag
system cannot provide protection
as intended and may cause addi-
tional injuries due to triggering.
There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Follow the information
on achieving the optimum protec-
tive effect of the airbag system.
162
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Even when you follow all
instructions very closely, injury
from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in cer-
tain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise
may lead to short-term and, in
most cases, temporary hearing
impairment in sensitive occu-
pants.
Vehicle modifications for a per-
son with disabilities may affect
the air bag system; contact the
Toyota dealer for further infor-
mation.
Warnings and information on the
airbags are also found on the
sun visors.
Have the system checked.
The airbags are not designed to
be used in place of the seat
belts.
The SRS front airbags and SRS
knee airbags are designed to
Functional readiness of
the airbag system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot
after triggering of the airbag sys-
tem. There is a risk of injury. Do
not touch individual components.
WARNING
Improperly executed work can
lead to failure, malfunction or
unintentional triggering of the
airbag system. In the case of a
malfunction, the airbag system
might not trigger as intended
despite the accident severity.
There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled
and scrapped by your Toyota
dealer.
Display in the instrument
cluster
When drive-ready state is
switched on, the warning
light in the instrument
cluster lights up briefly and
thereby indicates the func-
tion readiness of the entire
airbag system and the belt
tensioners.
Malfunction
Warning light does not
come on when
drive-ready state is
switched on.
The warning light lights
up continuously.
SRS front airbag/SRS knee
airbag
163
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
supplement the seat belts, not
be used in place of them, to
increase their effectiveness as
an occupant protection device.
SRS is an acronym for Supplemen-
tal Restraint System
In the event of a collision, the
seat belts restrain the occupants
in their seats, but if the impact of
the collision is especially
severe, there is danger of an
occupant’s head and chest con-
tacting the steering wheel, dash-
board and windshield. In this
case, the SRS front airbags and
SRS knee airbags deploy
(inflate), instantly creating an air
cushion to help reduce the
impact on the occupants and
restrain them from contacting
the steering wheel, etc. with
their head, chest and knees.
The SRS front air bags and SRS
knee airbags deploy only when
an impact exceeding a certain
threshold is detected. In a colli-
sion, even if the impact is
severe enough to cause the
vehicle body to deform, the SRS
airbags may not deploy if the
impact of the collision is suffi-
ciently dispersed by the crash
structures of the vehicle body. If
the force of the collision does
not cause the airbags to deploy,
the seatbelts will protect the
occupants.
When an airbag deploys, as it
will inflate nearly instantly, it may
impact an occupant and cause
an injury, or the loud noise emit-
ted by ignition or deployment
may cause temporary partial
loss of hearing. Also, as an
airbag and nearby parts will be
extremely hot after the airbag
deploys, touching them may
cause burns. For these reasons,
deployment of the airbags is not
entirely risk free. Therefore, in
order to reduce this risk, the
airbags are designed to only
deploy when additional reduc-
tion of the impact applied to the
occupants in a collision is nec-
essary.
WARNING
Wear the seatbelt correctly and sit
with the correct posture.
If you sit with your head too close
to the steering wheel, when the
SRS front airbag deploys, it may
apply a very large impact to your
body. Sit in the driver’s seat with
the correct posture and keep an
appropriate distance away from
the steering wheel.
164
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
When the vehicle is involved in
a frontal collision which exceeds
a threshold equivalent to collid-
ing with a concrete wall which
does not move or deform
When an impact which exceeds
a threshold is applied to the
vehicle at an angle of 30
degrees or less of the front left
WARNING
Do not position the passenger’s
seat too close to the dashboard or
rest your feet on the dashboard,
as doing so may lead to a serious
injury if the SRS airbags deploy.
Sit in the passenger’s seat with
the correct posture and keep an
appropriate distance away from
the dashboard.
WARNING
Do not attach anything to or lean
anything against areas near the
SRS airbags.
Do not install or attach anything,
such as a sticker to areas such as
the steering wheel pad and near
the SRS knee airbags. Also, do
not attach any accessories, such
as an air freshener, to the passen-
ger’s side instrument panel or
place anything on the floor in front
of the seat. If anything is attached
to or left in these areas, they may
prevent an airbag from deploying
or become a projectile when the
airbags deploy.
The SRS front airbags and
SRS knee airbags will deploy
when
165
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
or right corner of the vehicle (A)
When an impact which exceeds
a threshold is applied to the
underside of the vehicle
When the vehicle collides with a
curb
When the vehicle falls into a
deep hole or ditch
When the vehicle is jumped and
lands hard
When the vehicle is involved in
a frontal collision with parked
vehicle with approximately the
same mass
When the vehicle is involved in
an underride collision with a
truck
The SRS front airbags and
SRS knee airbags may
deploy when
The threshold for the SRS
front airbags and SRS knee
airbags to deploy will
increase considerably when
166
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
When the vehicle collides with a
power pole or tree
When the vehicle collides with
an object which deforms or
moves easily, such as a guard-
rail
When the vehicle is involved in
a rear-end collision
When the vehicle is involved in
a side collision
When the vehicle is involved in
a rollover
When a severe impact is applied
to front of the vehicle while slid-
ing
167
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
When a severe impact is applied
to the front of the vehicle in a
side collision
When a subsequent collision
occurs after the SRS front
airbags or SRS knee airbags
have operated
When only a small impact is
applied to the front of the
vehicle in a collision
When the SRS airbag warn-
ing light is illuminated
The airbags are not designed to
be used in place of the seat
belts.
The SRS side airbags and SRS
curtain shield airbags are
designed to deploy and protect
the torso and head of occupants
when a severe impact is applied
to the side of the vehicle.
In the event of a side collision,
the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain shield airbag on that side
deploys (inflates), instantly cre-
ating an air cushion to help
reduce the impact on the occu-
pants and restrain them from
contacting the door window,
door, etc. with their head and
torso. When an airbag deploys,
as it will inflate nearly instantly, it
may impact an occupant and
cause an injury, or the loud
noise emitted by ignition or
deployment may cause tempo-
rary partial loss of hearing. Also,
as an airbag and nearby parts
will be extremely hot after the
airbag deploys, touching them
may cause burns. For these rea-
sons, deployment of the airbags
is not entirely risk free. There-
fore, in order to reduce this risk,
the airbags are designed to only
deploy when additional reduc-
tion of the impact applied to the
occupants in a collision is nec-
essary.
If the force of the collision does
not cause the airbags to deploy,
the seatbelts will protect the
occupants.
The SRS front airbags and
SRS knee airbags will not
deploy when
SRS side airbag/SRS cur-
tain shield airbag
168
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
When the vehicle is involved in
a severe side collision
When a severe impact is applied
to the bottom of the vehicle,
such as when driving over a
large object in the road
WARNING
Do not install seat covers which
are not designed for use with this
vehicle, or attach a cushion or any
other accessory to either front
seat or hang anything on either
front seatback. Do not place
objects around the side of either
front seat. Refer to P.160 for the
installation position of the SRS
side airbags.
WARNING
Do not lean against the door or
door window.
Also, do not install a cup holder or
any other accessories near the
SRS side airbags.
If anything is attached to or left in
the deployment area of an SRS
side airbag, the airbag may be
prevented from deploying or the
object may become a projectile
when the airbag deploys, possibly
leading to injury. Also, if an occu-
pant is leaning into this area, the
airbag may strike and injure the
head or arm of the occupant when
deploying.
When using a cup holder, use the
use the existing cup holders in the
vehicle. Do not place anything but
appropriately sized containers
into the cup holders. Refrain from
placing hot drinks or glass con-
tainers in the cup holders as they
may cause burns or other injuries
in the event of a collision or sud-
den braking.
The SRS side airbags and
SRS curtain shield airbags
will deploy when
The SRS side airbags and
SRS curtain shield airbags
may deploy when
169
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
When severe impact is applied
to a wheel or tire, or the suspen-
sion of the vehicle
When the vehicle is involved in
a side collision in an area away
from the cabin (engine compart-
ment, luggage compartment,
etc.)
When the vehicle is involved in
an offset angle side collision
When a subsequent collision
occurs after a SRS side
airbag or SRS curtain shield
airbag has operated
When only a small impact is
applied to the side of the vehi-
cle in a collision
When the SRS airbag warn-
ing light is illuminated
When the majority of the initial
force of an impact is applied
only to a door
The explosive power that acti-
vates driver's/front-seat passen-
ger airbags very much depends
on the positions of the
driver's/front passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this
function over the long term, cali-
brate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears
The threshold for the SRS
side airbags and SRS curtain
shield airbags to deploy will
increase considerably when
The SRS side airbags and
SRS curtain shield airbags
will not deploy when
Strength of the driver's
and front-seat passenger
airbag
170
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
on the Control Display.
A corresponding message
appears on the Control Display.
1 Press the switch and move
the respective seat all the
way forward, until it stops.
2 Press the switch forward
again. The seat still moves
forward slightly.
3 Readjust the seat to the
desired position.
The calibration procedure is
completed when the message
on the Control Display disap-
pears.
If the message continues to be
displayed, repeat the calibration.
If the message does not disap-
pear after a repeat calibration,
have the system checked as
soon as possible.
The system reads if the front
passenger seat is occupied by
measuring the human body's
resistance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on
the front passenger's side are
activated or deactivated.
Before transporting a child on
the front passenger seat, refer
to the safety information and
instructions for children on the
front passenger seat, see Chil-
dren.
When transporting older chil-
dren and adults, the front-seat
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when
moving the seats. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear
prior to any adjustment.
Automatic deactivation of
the front-seat passenger
airbags
Concept
General information
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passen-
ger airbag function, the system
must be able to detect whether a
person is sitting in the front pas-
senger seat. The entire seat cush-
ion area must be used for this
purpose. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that
the front passenger keeps his or
her feet in the floor area.
Malfunction of the auto-
matic deactivation system
171
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
passenger airbags may be
deactivated in certain sitting
positions. In this case, the indi-
cator light for the front-seat pas-
senger airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting
position so that the front-seat
passenger airbags are acti-
vated and the indicator light
goes out.
If it is not possible to establish
the desired condition, do not
transport the person in the front
passenger seat.
To enable correct recognition of
the occupied seat cushion.
Do not attach covers, cush-
ions, ball mats or other items
to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically
determined to be safe for use
on the front passenger seat.
Do not place any electronic
devices on the front passen-
ger seat if a child restraint
system is to be installed on it.
Do not place objects under
the seat that could press
against the seat from below.
No moisture in or on the seat.
The indicator light for the
front-seat passenger airbag in
the roofliner indicates the oper-
ating state of the front-seat pas-
senger airbag.
The light indicates whether the
airbags are either activated or
deactivated.
After drive-ready state is
switched on, the light briefly
lights up and then indicates
whether the airbags are either
activated or deactivated.
The system generally detects
children seated in a child
restraint system, particularly in
child restraint systems required
by NHTSA at the point in time
when the vehicle was manufac-
tured. After installing a child
restraint system, make sure that
the indicator light for the
front-seat passenger airbags
lights up. This indicates that the
Indicator light for the
front-seat passenger
airbags
The indicator light lights
up when a child is prop-
erly seated in a child
restraint system or when
the seat is empty. The
airbags on the front pas-
senger side are not acti-
vated.
The indicator light does
not light up when, for
instance a correctly
seated person of suffi-
cient size is detected on
the seat. The airbags on
the front passenger side
are activated.
Detected child restraint
systems
172
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
child restraint system has been
detected and the front-seat pas-
senger airbags are not acti-
vated.
Toyota Supra Safety enables
central operation of the driver
assistance system.
Depending on how the vehicle is
equipped, Toyota Supra Safety
consists of one or more systems
that can help prevent an immi-
nent collision.
Pre-Collision System, refer to
page 174.
Pre-Collision System (for
pedestrians and bicycles),
refer to page 179.
Lane departure warning, refer
to page 184.
Blind spot monitor, refer to
page 189.
Toyota Supra Safety
Concept
General information
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style
to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot
serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not
output warnings or reactions or
these might be output late, incor-
rectly, or without justification.
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropri-
ate.
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual
functions can malfunction during
tow-starting/towing with the
Toyota Supra Safety systems acti-
vated. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Switch all Toyota Supra
Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.
173
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Some Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems are automatically active
after every departure. Some
Toyota Supra Safety systems
activate according to the last
setting.
The menu for the Toyota Supra
Safety system is displayed.
If all Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems were switched off, all sys-
tems are now switched on.
"Customize Settings": depend-
ing on the equipment version,
the Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems can be individually config-
ured. The individual settings are
activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As
soon as a setting is changed on
the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
"ALL ON": all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are switched on.
Basic settings are activated for
the sub-functions, for instance
setting for warning time.
"Customized": the Toyota Supra
Safety systems are switched on
according to the individual set-
tings.
Some Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems cannot be individually
switched off.
All Toyota Supra Safety systems
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Toyota Supra Safety
Switching on/off
Button Status
Indicator lights up
green: all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are
switched on.
Indicator lights up
orange: some Toyota
Supra Safety systems
are switched off or cur-
rently unavailable.
Indicator does not light
up: all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are
switched off.
Press the button:
Press the button repeat-
edly. The following set-
tings are switched
between:
Press and hold this button:
174
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
are switched off.
The system may prevent some
accidents. In the event of an
accident, the system may
reduce impact speed.
The system sounds a warning
before an imminentcollision and
activates brakes inde-
pendently,if needed.
Depending on the equipment
version, the system is controlled
by the following sensors:
Camera in the area of the
interior mirror.
Radar sensor in the front
bumper.
The approach control warning is
available even if cruise control
has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching
another vehicle intentionally, the
approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to
avoid false system reactions.
The system issues a two-phase
warning of a possible risk of col-
lision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
The timing of warnings may vary
with the current driving situation.
Front collision mitigation
Concept
General information
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot
serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not
issue warnings or reactions, or
these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with
their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual
functions can malfunction during
tow-starting/towing with the
Toyota Supra Safety systems acti-
vated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Toyota Supra Safety
systems off prior to tow-start-
ing/towing.
175
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The camera is installed near the
interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of
the interior mirror clean and
clear.
The radar sensor is located in
the lower area of the front
bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean
and unobstructed.
The system is automatically
active after every driving off.
The menu for the Toyota Supra
Safety system is displayed.
If all Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems were switched off, all sys-
tems are now switched on.
"Customize Settings": depend-
ing on the equipment version,
the Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems can be individually config-
ured. The individual settings are
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Toyota Supra Safety
Camera
With radar sensor
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
176
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As
soon as a setting is changed on
the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
The following settings are
switched between:
"ALL ON": all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are switched on.
Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"Customize": the Toyota Supra
Safety systems are switched on
according to the individual set-
tings.
Some Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems cannot be individually
switched off.
All Toyota Supra Safety systems
are switched off.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Toyota Supra Safety"
4 "Front collision warning"
5 Select desired setting:
"Early"
"Medium"
"Late": only acute warnings
are displayed.
The selected time is stored for
the driver profile currently used.
A warning symbol appears in
the instrument cluster and in the
Head-up Display, where avail-
able, if a collision with a
detected vehicle is imminent.
Press the button repeat-
edly.
Press and hold this button.
Button Status
Indicator lights up
green: all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are
switched on.
Indicator lights up
orange: some Toyota
Supra Safety systems
are switched off or cur-
rently unavailable.
Indicator does not light
up: all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are
switched off.
Setting the warning time
Warning with braking
function
Display
Button Status
177
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
This warning is provided, for
instance when there is impend-
ing danger of a collision or the
distance to the vehicle ahead is
too small.
If a prewarning is provided,
respond by braking as war-
ranted.
An acute warning is displayed in
case of the imminent danger of
a collision when the vehicle
approaches another object at a
high differential speed.
Intervene in the case of an
acute warning. Depending on
the driving situation and the
equipment version, the acute
warning may be accompanied
by a brief activation of the brak-
ing system.
With the warning time setting
"late" the brief activation of the
braking system is omitted.
If an acute warning is provided,
the system may also provide
assistance, such as through
braking, when there is risk of
collision.
Acute warnings may be pro-
vided even when there has been
no prior warning.
The warning prompts the driver
to intervene. If a warning is
active, the maximum braking
force is used when the brake is
applied. The brake pedal must
be applied sufficiently quickly
and forcefully.
The system may also assist in
braking if there is a risk of colli-
sion.
When the vehicle is traveling at
a low speed, the vehicle may
come to a complete stop.
City brake function: the braking
intervention occurs to up to
approx. 53 mph/85 km/h.
With radar sensor: the braking
intervention occurs to up to
approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
At speeds above approx. 130
mph/210 km/h, the braking inter-
vention occurs as a brief braking
pressure. No automatic delay
occurs.
The braking intervention occurs
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red:
prewarning.
Brake and increase dis-
tance.
Symbol flashes red and
an acoustic signal
sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an
evasive maneuver, if
necessary.
Prewarning
Acute warning with braking
function
Braking intervention
178
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
only if vehicle stability has not
been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the VSC Vehicle
Stability Control System.
The driver may interrupt the
braking intervention function by
stepping on the accelerator
pedal or by actively moving the
steering wheel.
The system’s ability to detect
objects may be limited in some
circumstances. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Man-
ual regarding the limitations of
the system and actively inter-
vene as warranted.
If the vehicle speed exceeds
approx. 155 mph/250 km/h, the
system is deactivated temporar-
ily. When the vehicle slows
down to below this speed, the
system is reactivated.
Only objects that are detected
by the system are taken into
account.
The following situations may not
be detected, for instance:
Thus, a system reaction might
not come or might come late.
The following situations may not
be detected, for instance:
Slow moving vehicles when
you approach them at high
speed.
Vehicles that suddenly
swerve in front of you, or
sharply decelerating vehicles.
Vehicles with an unusual rear
appearance.
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead
of you.
The system may not be fully
functional in the following situa-
tions:
In heavy fog, wet conditions,
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system is designed to oper-
ate in certain conditions and cir-
cumstances. Due to conditions or
other factors, the system may not
respond. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to
property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the informa-
tion in this Owner’s Manual
regarding the scope of the sys-
tem’s operation and limitations.
Upper speed limit
Detection range
Functional limitations
179
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
or snowfall.
In tight curves.
If the driving stability control
systems are limited or deacti-
vated, for instance VSC OFF.
If the field of view of the cam-
era or the windshield is dirty
or covered in the area of the
interior mirror.
If the camera has overheated
and been temporarily
switched off due to exces-
sively high temperatures.
Depending on the equipment:
if the radar sensors are dirty
or covered.
Depending on the equipment
version: after improperly per-
formed work on the vehicle
paint.
After improperly performed
work on the vehicle paint in
the area of the radar sensors.
Up to 10 seconds after the
start of the engine via the
Start/Stop button.
During calibration of the cam-
era immediately after vehicle
delivery.
If there are constant blinding
effects because of oncoming
light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Attaching any objects such as
stickers or film in the beam area
of the radar sensors will also
impact the function of the radar
sensors and may even cause
them to fail.
The more sensitive the warning
settings are, for example the
warning time, the more warn-
ings are displayed. Therefore,
there may also be an excess of
premature or unjustified warn-
ings and reactions.
The system can help prevent
accidents involving pedestrians
and cyclists. In the event of an
accident, the system may
reduce impact speed. The sys-
tem sounds a warning in the city
speed range before an imminent
collision and activates brakes
independently, if needed.
The system issues a warning of
a possible risk of collision with
pedestrians and cyclists at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5
km/h.
The system reacts to pedestri-
ans and cyclists who are within
the detection range of the sys-
tem.
Warning sensitivity
Pre-Collision System (for
pedestrians and bicycles)
Concept
General information
180
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Depending on the equipment
version, the system is controlled
by the following sensors:
Camera in the area of the
interior mirror.
Radar sensor in the front
bumper.
The detection area in front of the
vehicle is divided into two areas:
Central area, arrow 1, directly
in front of the vehicle.
Expanded area, arrow 2, to
the right and left of the central
area.
A collision is imminent if pedes-
trians are located within the cen-
tral area. A warning is issued
about pedestrians who are
located within the extended area
only if they are moving in the
direction of the central area.
Detection range
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for thedriver’s personal
judgment in assessing visibili-
tyand traffic situation. There is a
risk of accident.Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions.
Watchtraffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot
serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not
issue warnings or reactions, or
these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with
their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual
functions can malfunction during
tow-starting/towing with the
Toyota Supra Safety systems acti-
vated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Toyota Supra Safety
systems off prior to tow-start-
ing/towing.
181
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The camera is installed near the
interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of
the interior mirror clean and
clear.
The radar sensor is located in
the lower area of the front
bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean
and unobstructed.
The system is automatically
active after every driving off.
The menu for the Toyota Supra
Safety system is displayed.
If all Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems were switched off, all sys-
tems are now switched on.
"Customize Settings": depend-
ing on the equipment version,
the Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems can be individually config-
ured. The individual settings are
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Toyota Supra Safety
Camera
With radar sensor
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
182
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As
soon as a setting is changed on
the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
The following settings are
switched between:
"ALL ON": all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are switched on.
Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"Customize": the Toyota Supra
Safety systems are switched on
according to the individual set-
tings.
Some Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems cannot be individually
switched off.
All Toyota Supra Safety systems
are switched off.
If a collision with a pedestrian or
a cyclist is imminent, a warning
symbol appears on the instru-
ment cluster and in the Head-up
Display.
Intervene immediately by brak-
ing or make an evasive maneu-
ver.
The warning prompts the driver
to intervene. If a warning is
active, the maximum braking
force is used when the brake is
applied. This requires the brake
Press the button repeat-
edly.
Press and hold this button.
Button Status
Indicator lights up
green: all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are
switched on.
Indicator lights up
orange: some Toyota
Supra Safety systems
are switched off or cur-
rently unavailable.
Indicator does not light
up: all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are
switched off.
Warning with braking
function
Display
The red symbol is dis-
played and a signal
sounds.
Alternatively, depending
on the vehicle equipment,
a red warning triangle
lights up in the instrument
cluster.
Braking intervention
Button Status
183
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
pedal to be depressed suffi-
ciently quickly and forcefully.
If there is a risk of collision, the
system may also assist with
braking.
When the vehicle is traveling at
a low speed, the vehicle may
come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention occurs
only if vehicle stability has not
been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the VSC Vehicle
Stability Control System.
The driver may cancel the brak-
ing intervention by stepping on
the accelerator pedal or by
actively moving the steering
wheel.
The system’s ability to detect
objects may be limited in some
circumstances. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Man-
ual regarding the limitations of
the system and actively inter-
vene as warranted.
The system responds to pedes-
trians and cyclists when the
speed of the vehicle is below
approx. 53 mph/85 km/h.
The system's detection potential
is limited.
Thus, a warning might not be
issued or be issued late.
The following situations may not
be detected, for instance:
Partially covered pedestrians.
Pedestrians that are not
detected as such because of
the viewing angle or contour.
Pedestrians outside of the
detection range.
Pedestrians having a body
size less than 32 in/80 cm.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system is designed to oper-
ate in certain conditions and cir-
cumstances. Due to conditions or
other factors, the system may not
respond. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to
property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the informa-
tion in this Owner’s Manual
regarding the scope of the sys-
tem’s operation and limitations.
Upper speed limit
Detection range
184
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
The system may not be fully
functional or may not be avail-
able in the following situations:
In heavy fog, wet conditions,
or snowfall.
In tight curves.
If the driving stability control
systems are deactivated, for
instance VSC OFF.
If the field of view of the cam-
era or the windshield is dirty
or covered in the area of the
interior mirror.
If the camera has overheated
and been temporarily
switched off due to exces-
sively high temperatures.
Depending on the equipment:
if the radar sensors are dirty
or covered.
Depending on the equipment
version: after improperly per-
formed work on the vehicle
paint.
Up to 10 seconds after the
start of the engine via the
Start/Stop button.
During calibration of the cam-
era immediately after vehicle
delivery.
If there are constant blinding
effects because of oncoming
light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
When it is dark outside.
The lane departure warning
alerts when the vehicle is about
to run off the road or exit the
lane.
This camera-based system
warns starting at a minimum
speed.
The minimum speed is coun-
try-specific and is displayed in
the menu for the Toyota Supra
Safety systems.
Warnings are issued by means
of a steering wheel vibration.
The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
The system does not provide a
warning if the turn signal is set
before leaving the lane.
If in the speed range up to 130
mph/210 km/h a lane marking is
crossed, the system intervenes
with a brief active steering inter-
vention in addition to vibrating.
The system thus helps keep the
vehicle in the lane.
Functional limitations
Lane departure warning
Concept
General information
185
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The camera must detect the
lane markings for the lane
departure warning to be active.
The camera is installed near the
interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of
the interior mirror clean and
clear.
The lane departure warning acti-
vates automatically after depar-
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing road and
traffic safety. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate. Do not jerk the
steering wheel in response to a
warning.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot
serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not
output warnings or reactions or
these might be output late, incor-
rectly, or without justification.
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropri-
ate.
Functional requirements
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Toyota Supra Safety
Camera
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
186
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
ture if the function was switched
on at the end of the last trip.
The menu for the Toyota Supra
Safety system is displayed.
If all Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems were switched off, all sys-
tems are now switched on.
"Customize Settings": depend-
ing on the equipment version,
the Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems can be individually config-
ured. The individual settings are
activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As
soon as a setting is changed on
the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
The following settings are
switched between:
"ALL ON": all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are switched on.
Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"Customize": the Toyota Supra
Safety systems are switched on
according to the individual set-
tings.
Some Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems cannot be individually
switched off.
All Toyota Supra Safety systems
are switched off.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Toyota Supra Safety"
4 "Lane Departure Warn."
5 Select desired setting:
"Early": the system promptly
issues a warning whenever a
hazardous situation is
detected.
"Medium": the system meets
the standardized safety
requirements.
"Reduced": some warnings
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Press the button repeat-
edly.
Press and hold this button.
Button Status
Indicator lights up
green: all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are
switched on.
Indicator lights up
orange: some Toyota
Supra Safety systems
are switched off or cur-
rently unavailable.
Indicator does not light
up: all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are
switched off.
Setting the warning time
187
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
are suppressed depending on
the situation, for instance
during passing without a turn
signal or when purposely driv-
ing over lane markings in
curves.
"Off": no warnings are issued.
The selected setting is stored for
the driver profile currently used.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Steering wheel vibration"
4 Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all
Toyota Supra Safety systems
and stored for the driver profile
currently used.
The steering intervention can be
switched on and off separately
for Blind spot monitor and lane
departure warning.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Toyota Supra Safety"
4 "Steering intervention"
The selected setting is stored for
the driver profile currently used.
If you leave the lane and if a
lane marking has been
detected, the steering wheel
vibrates in accordance with the
steering wheel vibration setting.
If the turn signal is switched on
before a lane change, a warning
is not issued.
If in the speed range up to 130
mph/210 km/h a lane marking is
crossed, the system intervenes
with a brief active steering inter-
vention in addition to vibrating.
The steering intervention helps
keep the vehicle in the lane. The
steering intervention can be
noticed on the steering wheel
and can be manually overridden
at any time. During an active
steering intervention, the display
in the instrument cluster will
blink.
Setting the force of the steer-
ing wheel vibration
Switching steering interven-
tion on/off
Display in the instrument
cluster
The system illuminates
green: at lane marking
was detected on at least
one side of the vehicle and
warnings can be issued.
Warning function
If you leave the lane
Steering intervention
188
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
In the event of multiple active
steering interventions by the
system within 3 minutes without
the driver's intervention at the
steering wheel, an acoustic
warning will sound. A short
warning signal will sound at the
second steering intervention.
Beginning with the third steering
intervention, an continuous
warning will sound.
In addition, a vehicle message is
displayed.
The warning signal and vehicle
message are an encouragement
to pay closer attention to the
lane.
The warning is canceled in the
following situations:
Automatically after approx. 3
seconds.
When returning to your own
lane.
When braking hard.
When using the turn signal.
If VSC Vehicle Stability Con-
trol System intervenes.
The system may not be fully
functional in the following situa-
tions:
In heavy fog, wet conditions,
or snowfall.
In the event of missing, worn,
poorly visible, merging,
diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construc-
tion areas.
When lane markings are cov-
ered in snow, ice, dirt or
water.
In tight curves or on narrow
lanes.
When lane markings are cov-
ered by objects.
When driving very close to the
vehicle in front of you.
If there are constant blinding
effects because of oncoming
light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning signal
End of warning
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all,
too late, incorrectly, or without jus-
tification due to the system limits.
There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Follow the
information regarding the system
limits and actively intervene if
needed.
Functional limitations
189
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
If the field of view of the cam-
era or the windshield is dirty
or covered in the area of the
interior mirror.
If the camera has overheated
and been temporarily
switched off due to exces-
sively high temperatures.
Up to 10 seconds after the
start of the engine via the
Start/Stop button.
During calibration of the cam-
era immediately after vehicle
delivery.
A vehicle message may be dis-
played when the system is not
fully functional.
Blind spot monitor detects vehi-
cles in the blind spot or vehicles
approaching from behind in the
adjacent lane. A warning is
issued in various gradations in
these situations.
Two radar sensors in the rear
bumper monitor the area behind
and next to the vehicle when
traveling faster than a minimum
speed.
The minimum speed is shown in
the menu for the Toyota Supra
Safety systems.
The system indicates whether
there are vehicles in the blind
spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind in the adjacent
lane, arrow 2.
The light in the exterior mirror
lights up dimmed.
Before you change lanes after
setting the turn signal, the sys-
tem issues a warning in the situ-
ations described above.
The light in the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel
vibrates.
Blind spot monitor
Concept
General information
190
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
The radar sensors are located in
the rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the
area of the radar sensors clean
and unobstructed.
The Blind spot monitor is auto-
matically activated after depar-
ture if the function was switched
on at the end of the last trip.
The menu for the Toyota Supra
Safety system is displayed.
If all Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems were switched off, all sys-
tems are now switched on.
"Customize Settings": depend-
ing on the equipment version,
the Toyota Supra Safety sys-
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style
to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot
serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not
output warnings or reactions or
these might be output late, incor-
rectly, or without justification.
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropri-
ate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Toyota Supra Safety
Radar sensors
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
191
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
tems can be individually config-
ured. The individual settings are
activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As
soon as a setting is changed on
the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
The following settings are
switched between:
"ALL ON": all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are switched on.
Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"Customized": the Toyota Supra
Safety systems are switched on
according to the individual set-
tings.
Some Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems cannot be individually
switched off.
All Toyota Supra Safety systems
are switched off.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Toyota Supra Safety"
4 "Blind spot monitor"
5 Select the desired setting.
"Off": with this setting, no warning is
output.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Steering wheel vibration"
4 Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all
Press the button repeat-
edly.
Press and hold this button.
Button Status
Indicator lights up
green: all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are
switched on.
Indicator lights up
orange: some Toyota
Supra Safety systems
are switched off or cur-
rently unavailable.
Indicator does not light
up: all Toyota Supra
Safety systems are
switched off.
Setting the warning time
Setting the force of the steer-
ing wheel vibration
192
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Toyota Supra Safety systems
and stored for the driver profile
currently used.
The dimmed light in the exterior
mirror indicates when there are
vehicles in the blind spot or
approaching from behind.
If the turn signal is switched on
while a vehicle is in the critical
zone, the steering wheel
vibrates briefly and the light in
the exterior mirror flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the
other vehicle has left the critical
area or after deactivation of the
turn signal.
A flashing of the light during
vehicle unlocking serves as sys-
tem self-test.
If the vehicle speed exceeds
approx. 155 mph/250 km/h, the
system is deactivated temporar-
ily.
If the vehicle speed falls below
approx. 155 mph/250 km/h, the
system once again responds
according to the setting.
The system may not be fully
functional in the following situa-
tions:
When a vehicle is approach-
ing at a speed much faster
than your own.
In heavy fog, wet conditions,
or snowfall.
In tight curves or on narrow
lanes.
Warning function
Light in the exterior mirror
Prewarning
Acute warning
Flashing of the light
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all,
too late, incorrectly, or without jus-
tification due to the system limits.
There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Follow the
information regarding the system
limits and actively intervene if
needed.
Upper speed limit
Functional limitations
193
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
If the bumper is dirty, iced up,
or covered, for instance by
stickers.
If cargo protrudes.
A vehicle message is displayed
when the system is not fully
functional.
Depending on the selected
warning settings, for instance
warning time, more warnings
can be displayed. However,
there may also be an excess of
premature warnings of critical
situations.
In the event of an accident, the
system can bring the vehicle to
a halt automatically without
intervention by the driver in cer-
tain situations. This can reduce
the risk of a further collision and
the consequences thereof.
After coming to a halt, the brake
is released automatically.
It can be necessary to bring the
vehicle in certain situations to a
halt quicker.
To do this, for a short time the
braking pressure applied when
stepping on the brake pedal
must be higher than the braking
pressure achieved by the auto-
matic braking function. This
interrupts automatic braking.
It can be necessary to interrupt
automatic braking in certain situ-
ations, for instance for an eva-
sive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
By pressing the brake pedal.
By pressing the accelerator
pedal.
The system can detect decreas-
ing alertness or fatigue of the
driver during long, monotonous
trips, for instance on highways.
In this situation, it is recom-
mended that the driver takes a
break.
Displaying warnings
Autonomous Emergency
Braking
Concept
At standstill
Harder vehicle braking
Interrupting automatic
braking
Driver attention control
General information
194
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
The system is switched on each
time drive-ready state is
switched on.
After travel has begun, the sys-
tem monitors certain aspects of
the driver's behavior, so that
decreasing alertness or fatigue
can be detected.
This procedure takes the follow-
ing criteria into account:
Personal driving style, for
instance steering behavior.
Driving conditions, for
instance length of trip.
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70
km/h, the system is active and
can also display a recommenda-
tion to take a break.
The Driver attention control is
active automatically with each
switching on of drive-ready state
and can thus display a break
recommendation.
The break recommendation can
also be switched on or off and
adjusted via Toyota Supra Com-
mand.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Driver attention control"
4 Select desired setting:
"Standard": the break recom-
mendation is made with a
defined value.
"Sensitive": the break recom-
mendation is issued earlier.
"Off": no break recommenda-
tion is made.
If the driver becomes less alert
or fatigued, a message is dis-
played in the Control Display
with the recommendation to
take a break.
During the display, the following
settings can be selected:
"Do not ask again"
"Places to stop"
"Remind me later"
The break recommendation is
repeated after 20 minutes.
After a break, another recom-
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing one's
physical state. An increasing lack
of alertness or fatigue may not be
detected or not be detected in
time. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Make sure that the driver is
rested and alert. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions.
Function
Break recommendation
Settings
Display
195
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
mendation to take a break can-
not be displayed until after
approximately 45 minutes.
The function may be limited in
the following situations, for
instance and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warn-
ing at all:
When the clock is set incor-
rectly.
When the vehicle speed is
mainly below about 43
mph/70 km/h.
With a sporty driving style,
such as during rapid accelera-
tion or when cornering fast.
In active driving situations,
such as when changing lanes
frequently.
When the road surface is
poor.
In the event of strong side
winds.
The system is reset approx. 45
minutes after parking the vehi-
cle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on
highways.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
ABS prevents locking of the
wheels during braking.
The vehicle maintains its steer-
ing power even during full brake
applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time
you start the engine.
Situations which the ABS can-
not operate sufficiently:
When entering a curve at an
excessively high rate of speed
System limits
Driving stability con-
trol systems
Vehicle features and
options
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
196
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
In this case, even if the ABS oper-
ates, it cannot operate sufficiently
to avoid a possible dangerous situ-
ation. The driver is solely responsi-
ble for understanding their
surroundings and driving at a safe
speed.
When you apply the brakes rap-
idly, the system automatically
produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces
the braking distance to a mini-
mum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the
capabilities provided by the Anti-
lock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on
the brake pedal for the duration
of the emergency stop.
In combination with Dynamic
radar cruise control, this system
ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking
in critical situations.
This system supports driving off
on uphill grades.
1 Hold the vehicle in place with
the foot brake.
2 Release the foot brake and
drive off without delay.
After the foot brake is released,
the vehicle is held in place for
approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load-
ing, the vehicle may roll back
slightly.
Within the physical limits, the
system helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing
engine speed and by braking
the individual wheels.
VSC detects the following unsta-
ble driving conditions, for
instance:
Fishtailing, which can lead to
oversteering.
Brake assist
Adaptive brake assist
Hill-start assist control
Concept
Driving off
VSC Vehicle Stability Con-
trol System
Concept
General information
197
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Loss of traction of the front
wheels, which can lead to
understeering.
When VSC is deactivated, driv-
ing stability is reduced during
acceleration and when driving in
curves.
To increase vehicle stability,
activate VSC again as soon as
possible.
When VSC is deactivated, VSC
OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing the traffic
situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situa-
tions. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
When driving with a roof load, for
instance with roof-mounted lug-
gage rack, the vehicle's center of
gravity is higher, which increases
the risk of the vehicle tipping in
critical driving situations. There is
a risk of accidents or risk of dam-
age to property. Do not deactivate
VSC Vehicle Stability Control Sys-
tem when driving with roof load.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
VSC OFF
Deactivating/activating
VSC
General information
Deactivating VSC
Hold the button down until
VSC OFF is displayed in
the instrument cluster and
the VSC OFF indicator
light is illuminated.
Activating VSC
Press the button.
VSC OFF and the VSC
OFF indicator light go out.
Display
In the instrument cluster
198
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
When entering a curve at an
excessively high rate of speed
In this case, even if the VSC oper-
ates, it cannot operate sufficiently
to avoid a possible dangerous situ-
ation. The driver is solely responsi-
ble for understanding their
surroundings and driving at a safe
speed.
Traction mode is a version of the
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
System where forward momen-
tum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum
headway on special road condi-
tions or loose road surfaces, for
instance unplowed snowy
roads, but with somewhat lim-
ited driving stability.
When Traction mode is acti-
vated, the vehicle has maximum
traction. Driving stability is lim-
ited during acceleration and
when driving in curves.
You may find it useful to briefly
activate Traction mode in the
following situations:
When driving in slush or on
uncleared, snow-covered
roads.
When driving off from deep
snow or loose ground.
When driving with snow
chains.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light lights
up: VSC is deactivated.
The indicator light flashes:
VSC controls the drive
and braking forces.
The indicator light lights
up: VSC has malfunc-
tioned.
Situations which the VSC
cannot operate sufficiently
Traction mode
Concept
General information
Overview
Button in the vehicle
VSC OFF
199
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
If Traction mode is activated,
TRACTION is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In certain situations, the VSC is
activated automatically:
If Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range is
activated.
On a braking intervention by
the Toyota Supra Safety sys-
tems.
The vehicle has a flat tire.
The active differential steplessly
locks the rear axle depending on
the driving conditions. This pro-
vides optimal power transfer in
all driving conditions by helping
prevent wheel spin at either rear
wheel.
The driver is responsible adapt-
ing his or her driving style to the
situation.
Activating/deactivating
Traction mode
Activating Traction mode
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster and
the indicator light for VSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating Traction mode
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the VSC
OFF indicator light go out.
Display
Display in the instrument
cluster
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light lights
up: Traction mode is acti-
vated.
Automatic program
change
Active differential
200
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Using this system, a desired
speed can be adjusted using the
buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the
desired speed. The system
accelerates and brakes auto-
matically as needed.
Depending on the vehicle set-
tings, the characteristics of the
Cruise Control may change.
Driver assistance sys-
tems
Vehicle features and
options
Cruise control
Concept
General information
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing the traffic
situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situa-
tions. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to
an increased risk of accidents in
the following situations, for
instance:
●
On winding roads.
There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Only use
the system if driving at constant
speed is possible.
●
In heavy traffic.
●
On slippery roads, in fog, snow,
or wet conditions, or on a loose
road surface.
WARNING
The desired speed can be incor-
rectly adjusted or called up by
mistake. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Adjust the desired speed to
the traffic conditions. Watch traf-
fic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
201
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The indicator will come on.
Cruise control is active. The cur-
rent speed is maintained and
stored as desired speed.
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
System is switched on, if neces-
sary.
The displays go out. The stored
desired speed is deleted.
The system is automatically
interrupted in the following situa-
tions, for example:
When the driver applies the
brakes.
When selector lever position
D is disengaged.
Traction mode is activated or
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
System is deactivated.
If VSC Vehicle Stability Con-
trol System intervenes.
Overview
Buttons on the steering
wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off,
refer to page 201.
Press the button with
the system interrupted:
Continue cruise control
with the last setting,
refer to page 203.
When active, press the
button: Pause cruise
control, refer to page
201.
Store current speed.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to
page 202.
Switching cruise control
on/off
Switching on
Press the button on the
steering wheel.
Switching off
Press the button on the
steering wheel.
Pausing cruise control
Interrupting manually
When active, press the
button.
Interrupting automatically
202
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Press the rocker switch up or
down once while the system is
interrupted.
When the system is switched
on, the current speed is main-
tained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed,
refer to page 203, on the speed-
ometer.
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
System is switched on, if neces-
sary.
The speed can also be stored
by pressing a button.
Press the rocker switch up or
down repeatedly until the
desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is
stored and the vehicle reaches
the stored speed when the road
is clear.
Each time the rocker switch is
pressed to the resistance
point, the desired speed
increases or decreases by 1
mph/1 km/h.
Each time the rocker switch is
pressed past the resistance
point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5
mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be
set depends on the vehicle.
Pressing the rocker switch to
the resistance point and hold-
ing it accelerates or deceler-
ates the vehicle without
requiring pressure on the
accelerator pedal.
Setting the speed
Maintaining and storing the
speed
Press the button.
Changing the speed
203
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
After the rocker switch is released,
the vehicle maintains its final
speed. Pressing the switch beyond
the resistance point causes the
vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
An interrupted cruise control can
be continued by calling up the
stored speed.
Make sure that the difference
between current speed and
stored speed is not too large
before calling up the stored
speed. Otherwise, unintentional
braking or accelerating may
occur.
Cruise control is continued with
the stored values.
In the following cases, the
stored speed value is deleted
and cannot be called up again:
When the system is switched
off.
When drive-ready state is
switched off.
With the proper equipment, the
value of the speed limit setting is
briefly displayed digitally.
Some system information can
also be displayed in the
Head-up Display.
The desired speed is also main-
tained downhill.
The speed may not be main-
tained on uphill grades if the
engine power is insufficient.
Continuing cruise control
Press the button with the
system interrupted.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Indicator light
Indicator light green:
system is active.
Gray indicator light: the
system has been inter-
rupted.
No indicator light: sys-
tem is switched off.
Status display
Displays in the Head-up
Display
The symbol is displayed
when the set desired
speed is reached.
System limits
204
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Using this system, a desired
speed and a distance to a vehi-
cle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering
wheel.
The system maintains the
desired speed on clear roads.
For this purpose, the vehicle
accelerates or brakes automati-
cally.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of
you, the system adjusts the
speed of your vehicle so that the
set distance to the vehicle
ahead is maintained. The speed
is adjusted as far as the given
situation allows.
A radar sensor is located in the
front bumper and a camera on
the interior mirror to detect vehi-
cles driving ahead of you.
Depending on the vehicle set-
tings, the characteristics of the
Cruise Control may change.
The distance can be adjusted in
several steps. For safety rea-
sons, it depends on the respec-
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you
brakes to a halt, and then pro-
ceeds to drive again within a
brief period, the system is able
to detect this within the given
system limits.
Dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed
range
Concept
General information
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing the traffic
situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situa-
tions. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin
to move and possibly roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle
is secured against rolling away,
follow the following:
●
Set the parking brake.
●
On uphill grades or on a
downhill slope, turn the front
wheels in the direction of the
curb.
●
On uphill grades or on a
downhill slope, also secure the
vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
205
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The radar sensor is located in
the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean
and unobstructed.
WARNING
The desired speed can be incor-
rectly adjusted or called up by
mistake. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Adjust the desired speed to
the traffic conditions. Watch traf-
fic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high
speed differences to other vehi-
cles, for instance in the following
situations:
●
When fast approaching a slowly
moving vehicle.
There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where
appropriate.
●
Vehicle suddenly swerving into
own lane.
●
When fast approaching stand-
ing vehicles.
Overview
Buttons on the steering
wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off,
refer to page 206.
Store current speed.
When active, press the
button: Pause cruise
control, refer to page
206.
Press the button with
the system interrupted:
Continue cruise control
with the last setting,
refer to page 208.
Increase distance, refer
to page 208.
Switch distance control
on/off.
Reduce distance, refer
to page 208.
Switch distance control
on/off.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to
page 207.
Radar sensor
Button Function
206
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
The camera is installed near the
interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of
the interior mirror clean and
clear.
The system is best used on
well-constructed roads.
The minimum speed that can be
set is 20 mph/30 km/h.
The maximum speed that can
be set is 100 mph/160 km/h.
The system can also be acti-
vated when stationary.
The indicator will come on.
Cruise control is active. The cur-
rent speed is maintained and
stored as desired speed.
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
System is switched on, if neces-
sary.
To switch off the system while
standing, step on brake pedal at
the same time.
Press the following button on
the steering wheel again:
The displays go out. The stored
desired speed is deleted.
When active, press the following
button on the steering wheel:
If interrupting the system while
stationary, press on the brake
pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically
interrupted in the following situa-
tions:
When the driver applies the
brakes.
When selector lever position
D is disengaged.
Traction mode is activated or
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
System is deactivated.
Camera
Area of application
Switching on/off and inter-
rupting cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the
steering wheel.
Switching off
Button on the steering
wheel.
Interrupting manually
Button on the steering
wheel.
Interrupting automatically
207
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
If VSC Vehicle Stability Con-
trol System intervenes.
If the safety belt is unbuckled
and the driver's door is
opened while the vehicle is
standing still.
If the system has not detected
objects for an extended
period, for instance on a road
with very little traffic without
curb or shoulder markings.
If the detection range of the
radar is impaired, for instance
by dirt or heavy fog.
After a longer stationary
period when the vehicle has
been braked to a stop by the
system.
Press the rocker switch up or
down once while the system is
interrupted. The system will be
activated.
The current speed is maintained
and stored as desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed
on the speedometer.
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
System is switched on, if neces-
sary.
The speed can also be stored
by pressing a button.
Press the rocker switch up or
down repeatedly until the
desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is
stored and the vehicle reaches
the stored speed when the road
is clear.
Each time the rocker switch is
pressed to the resistance
point, the desired speed
increases or decreases by 1
mph/1 km/h.
Each time the rocker switch is
pressed past the resistance
point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5
mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in posi-
Setting the speed
Maintaining and storing the
speed
Press the button.
Changing the speed
208
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
tion to repeat the action.
Instrument cluster will display
selected distance, refer to page
208.
Instrument cluster will display
selected distance, refer to page
208.
An interrupted cruise control can
be continued by calling up the
stored speed.
Make sure that the difference
between current speed and
stored speed is not too large
before calling up the stored
speed. Otherwise, unintentional
braking or accelerating may
occur.
Cruise control is continued with
the stored values.
In the following cases, the
stored speed value is deleted
and cannot be called up again:
When the system is switched
off.
When drive-ready state is
switched off.
Selected distance to the vehicle
ahead of you is shown.
Adjusting distance
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment. Due to the system lim-
its, braking can be late. There is a
risk of accidents or risk of damage
to property. Be aware to the traffic
situation at all times. Adjust the
distance to the traffic and weather
conditions and maintain the pre-
scribed safety distance, possibly
by braking.
Reduce distance
Press the button repeat-
edly until the desired dis-
tance is set.
Increase distance
Press the button repeat-
edly until the desired dis-
tance is set.
Continuing cruise control
Press the button to
resume system operation
when it is canceled.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Status display
The selected desired
speed will be displayed.
Distance to vehicle ahead of
you
SET
110
209
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
As soon as the detected vehicle
drives off, the vehicle symbol in
the distance indicator will move
away.
To accelerate, activate ACC, for
instance by briefly stepping on
the accelerator pedal or press-
ing the rocker switch.
Symbol Description
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set
automatically after
the system is
switched on.
System interrupted.
No distance control
display, as the accel-
erator pedal is being
pressed.
Detected vehicle
Symbol Description
Green symbol:
A vehicle has been
detected ahead of
you. The system
maintains the set dis-
tance to the vehicle
in front.
210
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Some system information can
also be displayed in the
Head-up Display.
The distance information is
active in the following situations:
Dynamic radar cruise control
switched off.
Display in the Head-up Dis-
play selected, refer to page
150.
Distance too short.
Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
The detection capacity of the
system and the automatic brak-
ing capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for
instance might not be detected.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol Description
Indicator light green:
system is active.
No indicator light:
system is switched
off.
Vehicle symbol
flashes:
The conditions are
not adequate for the
system to work.
The system was
deactivated but
applies the brakes
until you actively
resume control by
pressing on the
brake pedal or accel-
erator pedal.
The vehicle symbol
and distance bars
flash red and an
acoustic signal
sounds:
Brake and make an
evasive maneuver, if
necessary.
Displays in the Head-up
Display
Desired speed
The symbol is displayed
when the set desired
speed is reached.
Distance information
The symbol is displayed
when the distance from
the vehicle traveling
ahead is too short.
System limits
Detection range
211
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The system does not decelerate
in the following situations:
For pedestrians or similarly
slow-moving road users.
For red traffic lights.
For cross traffic.
For oncoming traffic.
A vehicle driving in front of you
is not detected until it is com-
pletely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you
suddenly swerves into your
lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the
selected distance. It may not be
possible to restore the selected
distance in certain situations,
including if you are driving sig-
nificantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for
instance when rapidly approach-
ing a truck. When a vehicle driv-
ing ahead of you is reliably
detected, the system requests
that the driver intervene by brak-
ing and carrying out evasive
maneuvers, if needed.
If the desired speed is too high
for a curve, the speed is
reduced slightly, although
curves cannot be anticipated in
advance. Therefore, drive into a
curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detec-
tion range. Situations can arise
in tight curves where a vehicle
driving ahead will not be
detected or will be detected very
late.
When you approach a curve the
system may briefly report vehi-
cles in the next lane due to the
bend of the curve. If the system
decelerates you may compen-
Deceleration
Swerving vehicles
Cornering
212
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
sate it by briefly accelerating.
After releasing the accelerator
pedal the system is reactivated
and controls speed inde-
pendently.
In some situations, the vehicle
cannot drive off automatically;
for example:
On steep uphill grades.
From bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the
accelerator pedal.
The following restrictions can
occur under unfavorable
weather or light conditions:
Poorer vehicle recognition.
Short-term interruptions for
vehicles that are already rec-
ognized.
Examples of unfavorable
weather or light conditions:
Wet conditions.
Snowfall.
Slush.
Fog.
Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to
the current traffic situation. If
necessary, intervene actively,
for instance by braking, steering
or evading.
The desired speed is also main-
tained downhill. The speed may
not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is
insufficient.
The system cannot be activated
if the radar sensor is not aligned
correctly. This may be caused
by damage incurred, for
instance during parking.
A vehicle message is displayed
if the system fails.
Have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer.
The system may be impaired
when the detection range of the
radar sensor is partially covered
such as by the license plate
holder.
The function for detecting and
responding when approaching
stationary vehicles may be lim-
ited in the following situations:
During calibration of the cam-
era immediately after vehicle
delivery.
If the camera is malfunction-
ing or dirty. A vehicle mes-
sage is displayed.
Driving off
Weather
Engine power
Malfunction
Radar sensor
Camera
213
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
When the systems in the vehicle
e.g., Speed Limit Info, detect a
change of the speed limit along
the route, this new speed value
ca be applied for the following
systems:
Manual Speed Limiter.
Cruise Control.
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range.
The speed value is suggested
as the new desired speed to be
applied. To apply the speed
value, the corresponding system
must be activated.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Speed Assistant"
4 "Notes on speed limits"
Select the desired setting:
"adjust manually": detected
speed limit can be applied
manually.
"Show anticipation": detected
speed limits are displayed in
the instrument cluster without
being applied.
"Off": Speed Limit Assist will
be switched off.
Speed Limit Assist
Concept
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal
judgment in assessing the traffic
situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situa-
tions. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
The desired speed can be incor-
rectly adjusted or called up by
mistake. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Adjust the desired speed to
the traffic conditions. Watch traf-
fic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering
wheel
Button Function
Apply suggested speed
manually.
Switching on/off and
adjusting
214
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
A message is indicated in the
instrument cluster when the sys-
tem and cruise control are acti-
vated.
Speed Limit Assist is based on
the Speed Limit Info system.
Thus, also observe the system
limits of the Speed Limit Info
system, refer to page 142.
Parking Sensor is a support
when parking. Objects that you
are approaching slowly in front
of or behind the vehicle are indi-
cated by signal tones and a dis-
play on the Control Display.
Depending on the equipment
version: Obstacles at the side of
the vehicle that are detected by
the side ultrasonic sensors may
also be reported by the side pro-
tection, refer to page 218, func-
tion.
The ultrasound sensors for dis-
tance measurements are
located in the bumpers and pos-
sibly on the sides of the vehicle.
The maneuvering range,
depending on the obstacle and
environmental conditions, is
approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning sounds in
case of an impending collision at
a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
For objects behind the vehicle,
the acoustic warning is already
issued at a distance to the
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Symbol Function
Indicator light illumi-
nates green, together
with the symbol for a
cruise control system:
Speed Limit Assist is
active and detected
speed limits can be
applied manually for
the displayed system.
Detected change of a
speed limit with imme-
diate effect.
Indicator light illumi-
nates green: the
detected speed limit
can be applied with the
SET button.
As soon as the speed
limit has been applied,
a green checkmark is
displayed.
Taking over the sug-
gested speed
As soon as the SET icon
lights up, press the button.
System limits
Parking Sensors
Concept
General information
215
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Ensure full functionality:
Do not cover sensors, for
instance with stickers, bicycle
racks.
Keep the sensors clean and
unobstructed.
The system switches on auto-
matically in the following situa-
tions:
If selector lever position R is
engaged when the engine is
running.
Depending on the equipment
version: while approaching
detected obstacles if the
speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activa-
tion distance depends on the
situation in question.
You may switch automatic acti-
vation on and off when obsta-
cles are detected.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing the traffic
situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situa-
tions. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Due to high speeds when Parking
Sensors is activated, the warning
can be delayed due to physical
circumstances. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Avoid approaching an object
too fast. Avoid driving off fast
while Parking Sensors is not yet
active.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of
the Parking Sensor, for
instance in the bum-
pers.
Functional requirements
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
216
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Parking"
4 Where applicable: "Automatic
Parking Sens. activation"
5 "Automatic Parking Sensors
activ."
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
Depending on equipment, an
additional camera view is also
switched on.
The system switches off when a
certain driving distance or speed
is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if
needed.
On: the LED lights up.
Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is
displayed if the reverse gear is
engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
■
General information
When approaching an object, an
intermittent sound indicates the
position of the object. E.g., if an
object is detected to the left rear
of the vehicle, a signal tone
sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the
object, the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected
object is less than approx. 10
inches/25 cm, a continuous tone
is sounded.
If there are objects in front of
and behind the vehicle at the
same time, with a distance
smaller than approx. 10 in/25
cm, an alternating constant tone
will sound.
The intermittent tone and con-
stant tone are switched off if the
selector lever position P is
engaged.
The intermittent tone is switched
off after a short time when the
vehicle is stationary.
■
Volume
The Parking Sensor signal tone
volume can be adjusted.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "System settings"
Automatic deactivation
during forward travel
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance but-
ton.
WARNING
Signal tones
217
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
3 "Tone"
4 "Volume settings"
5 "Parking Sensor"
6 Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
The approach of the vehicle to
an object is shown on the Con-
trol Display. Objects that are far-
ther away are already displayed
on the Control Display before a
signal sounds.
The display appears as soon as
Parking Sensor is activated.
The range of the sensors is rep-
resented in the colors green,
yellow and red when obstacles
are detected.
Pathway lines are faded in for
better estimation of the required
space.
When the image of the rearview
camera is displayed, the switch
can be made to Parking Sensor
or to a different view with obsta-
cle markings as needed:
1 Press the Controller to the
left, if needed.
2 E. g. "Park. sensors only"
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert)
function, refer to page 224:
depending on the equipment, it
is warned in the Parking Sensor
display against vehicles
approaching in the front or rear
from the side.
The emergency braking function
of Parking Sensor initiates an
emergency braking in case of
acute risk of collision.
Due to system limits, a collision
cannot be prevented under all
circumstances.
The function is available from
walking speed while backing up
or rolling backward.
A press of the accelerator pedal
interrupts the braking interven-
tion.
After emergency braking to a
stop, further creeping toward an
obstacle is possible. To creep
toward the obstacle, lightly
Visual warning
Depending on the equip-
ment version: emergency
brake function, Parking
Sensors with emergency
braking function
Concept
General information
218
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
press the accelerator pedal and
release it again.
If the accelerator pedal is heav-
ily depressed, the vehicle drives
off as usual. Manual braking is
possible at any time.
The system uses the ultrasound
sensors of Parking Sensor and
parking assistant.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Parking"
4 "Park. Sens. w em. braking
funct."
5 "Park. Sens. w em. braking
funct."
The setting is stored for the
driver profile currently used.
The system warns of obstacles
on the side of the vehicle.
The system uses the ultrasound
sensors of Parking Sensor and
parking assistant.
To protect the sides of the vehi-
cle, obstacle markings are dis-
played on the vehicle at the
sides.
Color markings: warning
against detected obstacles.
Gray markings, hatched area:
no obstacles were detected.
No markings, black area: the
area next to the vehicle was
not yet captured.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing the traffic
situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic
and vehicle surroundings closely
and actively intervene where
appropriate.
Activating/deactivating the
system
Depending on the equip-
ment version: side protec-
tion
Concept
General information
Display
219
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The system only displays sta-
tionary obstacles that were pre-
viously detected by sensors
while passing them.
The system does not detect
whether an obstacle moves later
on. If the vehicle is stationary,
the markings are shown in black
after a certain time. The area
next to the vehicle must be
newly captured.
Ultrasonic measurements might
not function in the following situ-
ations:
For small children and ani-
mals.
For persons with certain cloth-
ing, for instance coats.
With external interference of
the ultrasound, for instance
from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
When sensors are dirty, iced
over, damaged or out of posi-
tion.
Under certain weather condi-
tions such as high relative
humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or
strong wind.
With tow bars and trailer cou-
plings of other vehicles.
With thin or wedge-shaped
objects.
With moving objects.
With elevated, protruding
objects such as ledges.
With objects with corners,
edges, and smooth surfaces.
With objects with a fine sur-
face structure such as fences.
For objects with porous sur-
faces.
With small and low objects,
for instance boxes.
With obstacles and persons at
the edge of the lane.
With soft obstacles or obsta-
cles covered in foam material.
With plants and bushes.
Low objects already dis-
played, for instance curbs,
can move into the blind area
of the sensors before or after
a continuous tone sounds.
Cargo that extends beyond
Limits of side protection
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all,
too late, incorrectly, or without jus-
tification due to the system limits.
There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Follow the
information regarding the system
limits and actively intervene if
needed.
Limits of ultrasonic measure-
ment
220
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
the perimeter of the vehicle is
not taken into account by the
system.
The system may issue a warn-
ing under the following condi-
tions even though there is no
obstacle within the detection
range:
In heavy rain.
When sensors are very dirty
or covered with ice.
When sensors are covered in
snow.
On rough road surfaces.
On uneven surfaces, such as
speed bumps.
In large buildings with right
angles and smooth walls, for
instance in underground
garages.
In automatic vehicle washes.
Due to heavy exhaust.
Due to other ultrasound
sources, for instance sweep-
ing machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
To prevent false alarms, switch
off Automatic Park Sensors
activ. on obstacle detection,
refer to page 221, for instance in
automatic vehicle washes.
A vehicle message is displayed.
Parking Sensor has failed. Have
the system checked by your
Toyota dealer.
The rearview camera provides
assistance in parking and
maneuvering backwards. The
area behind the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
False warnings
Malfunction
White symbol is displayed,
and the range of the sen-
sors is dimmed on the
Control Display.
Rearview camera
Concept
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing the traffic
situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic
and vehicle surroundings closely
and actively intervene where
appropriate.
221
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The camera lens is near the
license plate light.
The image quality may be
impaired by dirt. If necessary,
clean the camera lens.
The system is switched on auto-
matically if selector lever posi-
tion R is engaged when the
engine is running.
The system switches off when a
certain driving distance or speed
is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if
needed.
On: the LED lights up.
Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance func-
tions are shown on the Control
Display.
If the rearview camera view is
not displayed, change the view
via Toyota Supra Command:
1 If necessary, tilt the controller
to the side.
2 "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is
displayed.
The rearview camera is
Overview
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: button in the
vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Automatic deactivation
during forward travel
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance but-
ton.
Switching the view via
Toyota Supra Command
Functional requirements
222
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
switched on.
The trunk lid is fully closed.
Keep the recording range of
the camera clear. Protruding
cargo or carrier systems that
are not connected to a trailer
power socket can restrict the
visibility range of the camera.
More than one assistance func-
tion can be active at the same
time.
The assistance functions can be
manually activated.
1 Move the Controller to the
right, if needed.
2 With corresponding equip-
ment:
3 With corresponding equip-
ment: "Camera image"
"Parking aid lines".
Pathway lines and turning radius
lines are displayed, refer to page
222
.
"Obstacle marking".
Depending on the vehicle equip-
ment, the obstacles detected by
Parking Sensors are displayed,
refer to page
223
, by markings.
■
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to esti-
mate the space required when
parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the
steering angle and are continu-
ously adjusted to the steering
wheel movements.
■
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be
superimposed on the camera
image together with pathway
lines.
Turning radius lines show the
course of the smallest possible
turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is
displayed after the steering
Assistance functions
General information
Parking aid lines
223
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
wheel is turned past a certain
angle.
■
Parking using pathway and
turning radius lines
1 Position the vehicle so that
the red turning radius line
leads to within the limits of
the parking space.
2 Turn the steering wheel to
the point where the green
pathway line covers the cor-
responding turning radius
line.
Depending on the vehicle equip-
ment, obstacles behind the vehi-
cle are detected by the Parking
Sensors.
Obstacle markings can be faded
into the image of the rearview
camera.
The colored thresholds of the
obstacle markings match the
markings of the Parking Sen-
sors.
With the rearview camera
switched on:
1 Move the Controller to the
right, if needed.
2 "Camera image"
3
"Brightness"
"Contrast"
4 Set the desired value.
If the camera is deactivated, for
instance if the trunk lid is open,
the camera image is displayed
hatched in gray.
Very low obstacles as well as
high, protruding objects such as
ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Depending on the vehicle equip-
ment, some assistance func-
tions also consider data from the
Parking Sensors.
Follow the notes in the Parking
Sensors chapter.
The objects displayed on the
Control Display may be closer
Obstacle marking
Setting brightness and
contrast via Toyota Supra
Command
System limits
Deactivated camera
Detection of objects
224
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
than they appear. Do not esti-
mate the distance from the
objects on the display.
At blind driveways or when driv-
ing out of diagonal parking
spaces, approaching cross traf-
fic is detected sooner by the
system than is possible from the
driver's seat.
Two radar sensors in the rear
bumper monitor the area behind
the vehicle.
The system indicates approach-
ing traffic.
The radar sensors are located in
the rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the
RCTA (Rear cross traffic
alert) function
Concept
General information
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal
judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style
to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Radar sensors
225
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
area of the radar sensors clean
and unobstructed.
1 Press park assistance
button.
2 Move the Controller to the
right.
3 "Settings"
4 "Cross traffic alert"
5 "Cross traffic alert"
Or via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Parking"
4 "Cross traffic alert"
5 "Cross traffic alert"
If the system was activated on
the Control Display, it is auto-
matically switched on as soon
as Parking Sensors or Pan-
orama View is active and a gear
is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the
rear system is switched on.
The system is automatically
switched off in the following situ-
ations:
When the speed exceeds
walking speed.
When a certain driving dis-
tance is exceeded.
With an active parking opera-
tion of the parking assistant.
The respective display is called
up on the Control Display. A sig-
nal tone may sound and the light
in the exterior mirror may flash.
The light in the exterior mirror
flashes if vehicles are detected
by the rear sensors and your
own vehicle is moving back-
wards.
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the
system
Switching on automatically
Switching off automatically
WARNING
General information
Light in the exterior mirror
226
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
In the Parking Sensors view, the
respective boundary area
flashes red, if vehicles are
detected by the sensors.
In addition to the optical indica-
tor, a warning signal sounds if
your own vehicle moves into the
respective direction.
The system may not be fully
functional in the following situa-
tions:
If the speed of the approach-
ing vehicle is very high.
In heavy fog, wet conditions,
or snowfall.
In tight curves.
If the bumper is dirty, iced up,
or covered, for instance by
stickers.
If the field of view of the sen-
sors is covered, e.g., by
garage walls, hedges or snow
hills.
If cargo protrudes.
If crossing objects move at a
very slow speed.
If other objects are in the cap-
ture range of the sensors, that
hide cross traffic.
Display in the Parking Sen-
sors view
Acoustic warning
System limits
227
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The Adaptive variable suspen-
sion is a controllable sport chas-
sis/suspension. This system
reduces undesirable vehicle
motion when using a dynamic
driving style or traveling on
uneven road surfaces.
This enhances the driving
dynamics and driving comfort
depending on the road surface
condition and driving style.
The system offers several differ-
ent damping settings.
The damping settings are
assigned to the different driving
modes of the Sport mode
switch, refer to page 131.
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and
options
Adaptive variable suspen-
sion
Concept
General information
Driving mode Damper tuning
NORMAL Balanced
SPORT Firm
228
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The air quality in the vehicle is
improved by the following com-
ponents:
Emission tested car's interior.
Microfilter.
Air conditioning system to
control the temperature, air
flow and recirculated-air
mode.
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC.
Parked-car ventilation.
Climate control
Vehicle features and
options
Interior air quality
Safety notes
WARNING
When using the air conditioning
system, seat heaters, etc. for a
long period of time, make sure
that no body parts are kept near
the air outlets or in direct contact
with the seat, as doing so may
lead to minor burns or chill burns.
If you feel unusual while using the
air conditioning system or seat
heaters, stop use or change the
setting immediately.
Automatic air condition-
ing
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
229
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Press any button except for the
following:
Switching off.
Rear window defroster.
Seat heating.
Complete system:
The automatic air conditioning
achieves the set temperature as
quickly as possible, if needed,
by using the maximum cooling
or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
Climate control functions
Button Function
Temperature, refer to
page 229.
Air-conditioning mode,
see page 230.
Maximum cooling, refer
to page 230.
AUTO program, refer to
page 231.
Recirculated-air mode,
refer to page 231.
Switch off, refer to page
229.
Air distribution, man-
ual, refer to page 232.
Defrost and defog the
windshield, refer to
page 232.
Rear window defroster,
refer to page 233.
Seat heating, refer to
page 109.
Air flow, manual, refer
to page 232.
Switching on/off
Switching on
Switching off
Press and hold the but-
ton.
Temperature
Concept
Button Function
230
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Climate functions"
4 "Temperature adjustment,
upper body"
5 Set the desired temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between
different temperature settings.
Otherwise, the automatic air
conditioning will not have suffi-
cient time to adjust the set tem-
perature.
The air in the car's interior will
be cooled and dehumidified
and, depending on the tempera-
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be
cooled with the drive-ready state
switched on.
Air conditioning is switched on
with the engine running.
Depending on the weather, the
windshield and side windows
may fog up briefly when
drive-ready state is switched on.
The air conditioning is switched
on automatically with the AUTO
program.
When using the automatic air
conditioning, condensation
water develops and collects
underneath the vehicle.
The system is set to the lowest
temperature, optimum air flow
and recirculated-air mode with
the drive-ready state switched
on.
The function is available with
external temperatures above
approx. 32 °F/0 °C and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Settings
Turn the dial clockwise
to increase the tempera-
ture and
counterclockwise to
decrease the tempera-
ture.
Air conditioning
Concept
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Maximum cooling
Concept
General information
231
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the
upper body region. The vents
need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted
with the air flow active.
The AUTO program cools, venti-
lates or heats the car's interior
automatically.
The air flow, air distribution and
temperature will be controlled
automatically depending on the
interior temperature and the set-
ting for the desired temperature.
The LED is illuminated with the
AUTO program switched on.
Depending on the selected tem-
perature and outside influ-
ences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to
page 230, is switched on auto-
matically with the AUTO pro-
gram.
The AUTO program is switched
off automatically, when manual
air distribution is set.
You may react to unpleasant
odors or pollutants in the imme-
diate environment by temporar-
ily suspending the supply of
outside air. The system then
recirculates the air flow within
the vehicle.
The LED is illuminated when the
recirculated-air mode is
switched on.
When the left LED is illuminated:
Automatic recirculated air mode
If the pollution sensor detects pol-
lutants in the outside air, the air
mode is automatically changed
from outside air mode to recircu-
lated air mode.
When the right LED is illumi-
nated: Recirculated air mode
The air in the cabin is continuously
Switching on/off
Press the button.
AUTO program
Concept
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
Operation
Press the button repeat-
edly to select an operat-
ing mode.
232
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
recirculated.
To prevent window fogging,
recirculated-air mode switches
off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on
the environmental conditions.
With constant recirculated-air
mode, the air quality in the car's
interior deteriorates and the fog-
ging of the windows increases.
If there is window condensation,
switch off recirculated-air mode
or defog the windows, refer to
page 232.
The air flow for climate control
can be adjusted manually.
To manually adjust air flow
switch off AUTO program first.
The selected air flow is shown
on the climate control display.
The air flow may be reduced
automatically to save battery
power.
The air distribution for climate
control can be adjusted manu-
ally.
Windows, upper body region,
and floor area.
Upper body region and floor
area.
Floor area.
Windows and floor area.
Windows.
Windows and upper body.
Upper body region.
The selected air distribution is
shown on the climate control
display.
If there is window condensation,
defog the windows, refer to
page P.232.
Ice and condensation are
Controlling the air flow
manually
Concept
General information
Operation
Press the left or right
side of the button:
decrease or increase air
flow.
Controlling the air distri-
bution manually
Concept
Operation
Press the button repeat-
edly to select a program:
Defrost windshield and
remove condensation
Concept
233
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
quickly removed from the wind-
shield and the front side win-
dows.
The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
The air flow can be adjusted
manually with the system
switched on.
The function is available with the
engine running.
The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
certain period of time.
The microfilter removes dust
and pollen from the incoming air.
Have this filter changed during
vehicle maintenance, refer to
page 299.
The air flow directions can be
individually adjusted.
The air flow directions can be
adjusted for direct or indirect
ventilation.
The air flow is directed towards
the passengers. The air flow
heats or cools noticeably,
depending on the adjusted tem-
perature.
The air flow is not directed
towards the passengers. The
car's interior is warmed or
cooled indirectly, depending on
the set temperature.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
If there is any window
condensation, press the
button on the driver's
side or switch on the air
conditioning. Make sure
that air can flow to the
windshield.
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The
LED lights up.
Microfilter
Ventilation
Concept
Adjusting the ventilation
General information
Direct ventilation
Indirect ventilation
234
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
Lever for changing the air flow
direction, arrow 1.
Thumbwheel for variable
opening and closing of the
vents, arrow 2.
The car's interior can be cooled
or heated before driving off with
the parked-car ventilation.
Depending on set temperature
and ambient temperature, the
car's interior is ventilated or pos-
sibly heated using the residual
engine heat.
The system can be switched on
and off directly or via a preset
departure time.
The activation time is deter-
mined based on the external
temperature. The system
promptly switches on before the
selected departure time.
The vehicle is in idle state or
standby state and not in
drive-ready state.
Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched
on, the vehicle battery will be dis-
charged. Thus, limit the maximum
activation time to save the vehicle
battery. The system will be avail-
able again after the engine is
started or after a short trip.
Make sure that the vehicle's
date and time are set cor-
rectly.
Open the vents to allow air to
flow out.
There are different ways to
switch the system on or off.
The system switches off auto-
matically after a certain period of
time. The system continues to
run for some time after being
switched off.
■
General information
When the vehicle is in standby
state, the parked-car ventilation
can be switched on or off via the
automatic air conditioning but-
tons.
Front ventilation
Parked-car ventilation
Concept
General information
Functional requirements
Switching on/off directly
General information
Using the button
235
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
■
Switching on
Press any button except:
Rear window defroster.
Lower air flow button side.
Seat heating.
Menu.
■
Switching off
The system switches off after
leaving and locking the vehicle.
Press and hold the bot-
tom button.
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Climate functions"
4 "Comfort ventilation"
5 "Activate now"
Different departure times can be
adjusted to ensure a comfort-
able interior temperature in the
vehicle at the time of departure.
One-time departure time: the
time can be set.
The system is switched on once.
Departure time with week-
day: time and day of the week
can be set.
On the desired weekdays, the sys-
tem will be switched on promptly
before the set departure time.
The departure time is prese-
lected in two steps:
Set departure times.
Activate departure times.
A minimum of 10 minutes
should pass between set-
ting/activating the departure
time and the planned departure
time to allow a sufficient period
of time for the climate control.
■
Via Toyota Supra Command
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Climate ventilation"
4 "Comfort ventilation"
5 Select the desired departure
time.
Via Toyota Supra Command
Display
Symbol Description
Symbol on the auto-
matic air conditioning
indicates the system is
switched on.
REST is displayed on
the automatic air condi-
tioning. The residual
engine heat is used.
Departure time
Concept
Setting the departure time
236
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
6 Set the departure time.
7 Select day of the week, if
needed.
■
Functional requirement
If a departure time is to influ-
ence the switching on of
parked-car ventilation, the
respective departure time must
be activated first.
■
Via Toyota Supra Command
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle settings"
3 "Climate ventilation"
4 "Comfort ventilation"
5 "For departure time"
6 Activate the desired depar-
ture time.
The symbol on the automatic
air conditioning signals an acti-
vated departure time.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The integrated Universal
Remote Control in the interior
mirror can operate up to 3 func-
tions of remote-controlled sys-
tems, such as garage door
drives, barriers or lighting sys-
tems.
The Integrated Universal
Remote Control replaces up to 3
different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control,
the buttons on the interior mirror
must be programmed with the
Activating the departure time
Display
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and
options
Integrated Universal
Remote Control
Concept
General information
237
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in
order to program the remote
control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete
the stored functions for the sake
of security.
If possible, do not install the
antenna of the remote-con-
trolled system, e.g. the garage
gate drive, near metal objects to
ensure the best possible opera-
tion.
Additional questions are
answered by:
Your Toyota dealer.
www.homelink.com on the
Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trade-
mark of Gentex Corporation.
Buttons, arrow 1.
LED, arrow 2.
The hand-held transmitter,
arrow 3, is required for pro-
gramming.
The battery of the hand-held
transmitter must be fully
charged at the time of program-
ming to ensure an optimal range
of the integrated universal
remote control.
1 Switch on standby state.
2 Initial setup: Press and hold
the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously
for approximately 10 seconds
Safety information
WARNING
The operation of remote-con-
trolled systems with the integrated
universal remote control, such as
the garage door, may result in
pinched body parts. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the respective
system is clear during program-
ming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the
hand-held transmitter.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed
on the packaging or in
the owner's manual of
the system to be con-
trolled, the system is
generally compatible
with the integrated Uni-
versal Remote Control.
Control elements on the
interior mirror
Programming
General information
238
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
until the LED flashes green
rapidly. This erases all pro-
gramming of the buttons on
the interior mirror.
3 Press the interior mirror but-
ton to be programmed. The
LED on the interior mirror will
slowly begin flashing orange.
4 Hold the hand-held transmit-
ter for the system to be used
approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30
cm away from the buttons on
the interior mirror. The
required distance depends
on the hand-held transmitter.
5 Press and hold the button of
the desired function on the
hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the
hand-held transmitter was inter-
rupted, hold down the interior mirror
button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter
button for 2 seconds.
6
The LED lights up green: pro-
gramming completed.
Release the button.
The LED flashes fast: pro-
gramming is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir-
ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
form this procedure three times to
complete the programming proce-
dure.
If the integrated universal remote
control remains nonoperational,
continue with the special features
for change code wireless systems.
LED does not flash green
after 60 seconds: program-
ming not completed.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
To program other functions on
other buttons, repeat steps 3 to
5.
If you are unable to operate the
remote-controlled system after
repeated programming, please
check if the system to be con-
trolled features a rolling code
radio system.
Refer to the owner's manual for
the system.
For systems with a rolling code
radio system, the integrated
Universal Remote Control and
the system also have to be syn-
chronized.
Please read the owner's manual
to find out how to synchronize
the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the
aid of a second person.
Synchronizing the universal
remote control with the system:
1 Park the vehicle within range
of the remote-controlled sys-
tem.
2 Program the relevant button
on the interior mirror as
described.
Special feature of the rolling
code wireless system
239
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
3 Locate and press the syn-
chronizing button on the sys-
tem being programmed, e.g.
at the garage gate. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the
next step.
4 Hold down the programmed
button on the interior mirror
for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If neces-
sary, repeat this step up to
three times in order to finish
synchronization. Once syn-
chronization is complete, the
programmed function will be
carried out.
1 Switch on standby state.
2 Press and hold the interior
mirror button to be pro-
grammed.
3 As soon as the LED on the
interior mirror flashes orange
after approx. 20 seconds,
release the button.
4 Hold the hand-held transmit-
ter for the system to be used
approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30
cm away from the buttons on
the interior mirror. The
required distance depends
on the hand-held transmitter.
5 Press and hold the button of
the desired function on the
hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the
hand-held transmitter was inter-
rupted, hold down the interior mirror
button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter
button for 2 seconds.
6 The LED can light up in dif-
ferent ways.
The LED lights up green: the
programming procedure is
completed.
Release the button.
The LED flashes fast: the
hand-held transmitter was
detected but programming is
not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir-
ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
form this procedure three times to
complete the programming proce-
dure.
If the universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue
with the special features for change
code wireless systems.
LED does not flash green
after 60 seconds: program-
ming not completed.
Repeat steps
3 to 6
.
If the programming procedure is
not completed, the previous pro-
gramming will remain
unchanged.
Reprogramming individ-
ual buttons
240
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
The system, such as the garage
door, can be operated using the
button on the interior mirror
while the drive-ready or standby
state is switched on. To do this,
hold down the button within
receiving range of the system
until the function is activated.
The interior mirror LED stays lit
while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
All stored functions will be
deleted. The functions cannot
be deleted individually.
Press and hold the two outer
buttons on the interior mirror
simultaneously for approxi-
mately 10 seconds until the LED
on the interior mirror flashes
green rapidly.
Fold the sun visor down or up.
A vanity mirror is located in the
sun visor behind a cover. When
the cover is opened, the mirror
lighting switches on.
The lighter socket can be used
as a socket for electrical equip-
ment when standby and
drive-ready state are switched
on.
The total load of all sockets
must not exceed 140 watts at 12
volts.
Do not damage the socket by
using non-compatible connec-
tors.
Operation
WARNING
The operation of remote-con-
trolled systems with the integrated
universal remote control, such as
the garage door, may result in
pinched body parts. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the respective
system is clear during program-
ming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the
hand-held transmitter.
Deleting stored functions
Sun visor
Glare shield
Vanity mirror
Sockets
Concept
General information
241
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Pull off the cover.
Open the cover.
Follow the information regarding
the connection of mobile
devices to the USB interface in
the section on USB connec-
tions, refer to page 71.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfold-
ing area of the airbags, such as
portable navigation devices, can
hinder the unfolding of the airbag
or be thrown around in the car's
interior during unfolding. There is
a risk of injury. Make sure that
devices and cables are not in the
airbag's area of unfolding.
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle
battery can work with high volt-
ages and currents, which means
that the 12 volt on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only connect battery char-
gers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the
engine compartment.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the
socket, they can cause a short cir-
cuit. There is a risk of damage to
property. Replace the socket
cover again after using the
socket.
Center console
Cargo area
Wireless charger
USB interface
General information
242
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
The USB interface port is
located on the center console.
Properties:
USB port Type A.
For charging external
devices.
Charging current:
max. 1.5 A (vehicles without wire-
less charger)
max. 2.1 A (vehicles with wireless
charger)
For data transfer.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The following storage compart-
ments are available in the car's
interior:
Glove compartment, refer to
page 243.
Compartments in the doors,
refer to page 243.
Net in front passenger floor
area.
In the center console
Storage compart-
ments
Vehicle features and
options
Storage compartments
General information
243
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compart-
ment switches on.
Fold cover closed.
The glove compartment can be
locked with an integrated key.
This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is
locked, the remote control can
be handed over without the inte-
grated key, for instance when
the vehicle is parked by valet
parking.
There are storage compart-
ments in the doors.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a
cable connection to the vehicle,
for instance mobile phones, can
be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injury. Secure
loose objects or devices with a
cable connection to the vehicle in
the car's interior.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip
mats can damage the dashboard.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Glove compartment
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compart-
ment protrudes in the car's inte-
rior. Objects in the glove
compartment can be thrown into
the car's interior while driving, for
instance in the event of an acci-
dent or during braking and eva-
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of
injury. Always close the glove
compartment immediately after
using it.
Opening
Closing
Locking
Compartments in the
doors
General information
244
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Breakable objects, such as glass
bottles or glasses, can break in
the event of an accident or a brak-
ing or evasive maneuver. Broken
glass can be scattered in the car's
interior. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Do not
use any breakable objects while
driving. Only stow breakable
objects in closed storage com-
partments.
Cup holders
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup
holder may damage the cup hold-
ers or thrown into the car's inte-
rior, such as in the event of an
accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. Spilled liquids can dis-
tract from the traffic conditions
and lead to an accident. Hot
drinks can damage the cup holder
or lead to scalding. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Do not force objects into the
cup holder. Use lightweight,
unbreakable, and sealable con-
tainers. Do not transport hot bev-
erages.
Cargo area
Vehicle features and
options
Loading
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat
the tires, damage them internally
and cause a sudden drop in tire
inflation pressure. Driving charac-
teristics may be negatively
impacted, reducing lane stability,
lengthening the braking distances
and changing the steering
response. There is a risk of an
accident. Pay attention to the per-
mitted load capacity of the tires
and never exceed the permitted
gross weight.
245
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
1 Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s plac-
ard.
2 Determine the combined
weight of the driver and pas-
sengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3 Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kg or XXX
lbs.
4 The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lbs pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1,400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs).
5 Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6 If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual
to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a
cable connection to the vehicle,
for instance mobile phones, can
be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injury. Secure
loose objects or devices with a
cable connection to the vehicle in
the car's interior.
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can
shift and be thrown into the car's
interior, for instance in the event
of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. Vehicle
occupants can be hit and injured.
There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo prop-
erly.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can
cause damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure
that no fluids leak in the cargo
area.
Steps for Determining Cor-
rect Load Limit
246
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
The maximum load is the sum of
the weight of the occupants and
the cargo.
The greater the weight of the
occupants, the less cargo that
can be transported.
Cover sharp edges and cor-
ners on the cargo.
Heavy cargo: stow as far for-
ward and as low as possible,
ideally directly behind the
cargo partition.
Smaller and lighter cargo:
secure with ratchet straps or
with a cargo net or draw
straps.
Larger and heavy cargo:
secure with cargo straps.
Attach load securing aids, such
as lashing straps, tensioning
straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the
cargo area.
There are four lashing eyes in
the cargo area for securing
cargo.
A multi-function hook is located
on the left and right side in the
cargo area.
Load
Stowing and securing
cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
General information
Lashing eyes
Multi-function hook
General information
247
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
4
CONTROLS
A tensioning strap is available
on the right side trim for fasten-
ing small objects.
Small objects can be stowed in
the net on the left side. To trans-
port larger objects, slide the net
down. Grab the top of the net as
close as possible to the edge
next to the holder. At first, a
resistance must be overcome.
A storage compartment is avail-
able on the right side of the
cargo area.
Unlock the cover of the right
side panel, arrow 1, and fold up,
arrow 2.
Safety information
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function
hooks can lead to a risk of objects
flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Only hang
lightweight objects, such as shop-
ping bags, from the multi-function
hooks. Only transport heavy lug-
gage in the cargo area if it has
been appropriately secured.
Tensioning strap
Net
Storage compartment on
the right side
General information
Opening
248
4-1. CONTROLS
Supra Owner's Manual
249
Supra Owner's Manual
5
5
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING TIPS
.
5-1. DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when
driving........................ 250
Saving fuel .................. 255
250
5-1. DRIVING TIPS
Supra Owner's Manual
5-1.DRIVING TIPS
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Moving parts need to begin
working together smoothly.
The following instructions will
help you to achieve a long vehi-
cle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the
Launch Control, refer to page
130.
Do not exceed the maximum
engine and road speed:
For gasoline engine 4,500
rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown
under all circumstances.
The engine and vehicle speed
can gradually be increased.
Tire traction is not optimal due to
manufacturing circumstances
when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction poten-
tial after a break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Things to remember
when driving
Vehicle features and
options
Breaking-in period
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and compo-
nents, safety and driver assis-
tance systems can react with a
delay. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. After installing new parts or
with a new vehicle, drive conser-
vatively and intervene early if nec-
essary. Observe the break-in
procedures of the respective parts
and components.
Engine, transmission, and
axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Tires
251
5-1. DRIVING TIPS
Supra Owner's Manual
5
DRIVING TIPS
Brake discs and brake pads only
reach their full effectiveness
after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this
break-in period.
Observe the break-in proce-
dures again, if components
mentioned above are replaced.
Brake system
Following part replace-
ment
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Safety information
WARNING
An open trunk lid protrudes from
the vehicle and can endanger
occupants and other traffic partici-
pants or damage the vehicle in
the event of an accident, braking
or evasive maneuvers. In addi-
tion, exhaust fumes may enter the
car's interior. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Do not drive with the trunk lid
open.
Hot exhaust gas system
WARNING
During driving operation, high
temperatures can occur under-
neath the vehicle body, for
instance caused by the exhaust
gas system. If combustible mate-
rials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of
the exhaust gas system, these
materials can ignite. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Do not remove the heat
shields installed and never apply
undercoating to them. Make sure
that no combustible materials can
come in contact with hot vehicle
parts in driving operation, idle or
during parking. Do not touch the
hot exhaust gas system.
Mobile communication
devices in the vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile
phones can influence one
another. There is radiation due to
the transmission operations of
mobile phones. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. If possible, in the car's inte-
rior use only mobile phones with
direct connections to an exterior
antenna in order to exclude
mutual interference and deflect
the radiation from the car's inte-
rior.
252
5-1. DRIVING TIPS
Supra Owner's Manual
When visibility is poor due to
fog, even if it is daytime, turn the
low beam headlights on to make
your vehicle more visible to
other vehicles, etc. Drive with
caution at a low speed, using
the centerline, guardrails, tail-
lights of a preceding vehicle,
etc., as guide.
When the vehicle is being blown
by crosswinds, drive at a lower
speed and grip the steering
wheel stronger than normal.
The vehicle is especially sus-
ceptible to crosswinds when
exiting a tunnel or underpass,
when driving on a bridge or
embankment, or when passing
or being passed by a truck or
other large vehicle.
During a rain storm or when
the road surface is wet, the
road surface may be slippery
and visibility may be reduced.
In this case, turn the low
beam headlights on to make
your vehicle more visible to
other vehicles, etc. Increase
the distance between your
vehicle and preceding vehi-
cles and drive safely at a
lower speed than normal,
avoiding sudden accelera-
tion, braking or steering oper-
ations.
Use the rear defroster and air
conditioning system to pre-
vent the windows from fog-
ging up.
Hydroplaning is more likely to
occur when driving on ruts or
through large puddles.
Driving in inclement
weather
When visibility is poor due to
fog
During strong wind
When it is raining
253
5-1. DRIVING TIPS
Supra Owner's Manual
5
DRIVING TIPS
On wet or slushy roads, a
wedge of water can form
between the tires and road sur-
face.
This phenomenon is referred to
as hydroplaning. It is character-
ized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires
and the road surface, ultimately
undermining your ability to steer
and brake the vehicle.
When driving through water, fol-
low the following:
Drive through calm water
only.
Drive through water only if it is
not deeper than maximum 9.8
inches/25 cm.
Drive through water no faster
than walking speed, up to 3
mph/5 km/h.
The vehicle is equipped with the
Antilock Brake System ABS as a
standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in
situations that require such.
Steering is still responsive. You
can still avoid any obstacles with
a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and
sounds from the hydraulic cir-
cuits indicate that the Antilock
Brake System ABS is in its
active mode.
In certain braking situations, the
perforated brake discs can emit
functional noises. However,
functional noises have no effect
on the performance and opera-
tional reliability of the brake.
Hydroplaning
Driving through water
General information
Safety information
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through
too deep water, water can enter
into the engine compartment, the
electrical system or the transmis-
sion. There is a risk of damage to
property. When driving through
water, do not exceed the maxi-
mum indicated water level and the
maximum speed for driving
through water.
Braking safely
General information
254
5-1. DRIVING TIPS
Supra Owner's Manual
When roads are wet, salted, or
in heavy rain, gently press the
brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not
endanger other traffic.
The heat generated during brak-
ing dries brake discs and brake
pads and protects them against
corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will
be available when you need it.
■
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gra-
dients in the gear that requires
least braking effort. Otherwise,
the brakes may overheat and
reduce brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's
braking effect by shifting down,
going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
■
Safety information
Corrosion on the brake discs
and contamination on the brake
pads are increased by the fol-
lowing circumstances:
Low mileage.
Extended periods when the
vehicle is not used at all.
Infrequent use of the brakes.
Aggressive, acidic, or alka-
line cleaning agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake
discs will cause a pulsating
Objects in the area around
the pedals
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area
can limit the pedal distance or
block a depressed pedal. There is
a risk of an accident. Stow objects
in the vehicle such that they are
secured and cannot enter into the
driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle
and can be safely attached to the
floor. Do not use loose floor mats
and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is suf-
ficient clearance for the pedals.
Ensure that the floor mats are
securely fastened again after they
were removed, for instance for
cleaning.
Driving in wet conditions
Hills
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pres-
sure can lead to high tempera-
tures, brakes wearing out and
possibly even brake failure. There
is a risk of an accident. Avoid
placing excessive stress on the
brake system.
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine
switched off, safety-relevant func-
tions, for instance engine braking
effect, braking force boost and
steering assistance, are restricted
or not available at all. There is a
risk of an accident. Do not drive in
idle state or with the engine
switched off.
Brake disc corrosion
255
5-1. DRIVING TIPS
Supra Owner's Manual
5
DRIVING TIPS
effect on the brakes in their
response - generally this cannot
be corrected.
When using the automatic air
conditioning, condensation
water develops and collects
underneath the vehicle.
Higher mechanical and thermal
loads during racetrack operation
lead to increased wear. This
wear is not covered by the war-
ranty. The vehicle is not
designed for use in motor sports
competition.
Have vehicle checked by your
Toyota dealer before and after
driving on a racetrack.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The vehicle contains advanced
technologies for the reduction of
consumption and emission val-
ues.
Fuel consumption depends on a
number of different factors.
Carrying out certain measures,
such as a moderate driving style
and regular maintenance, can
influence fuel consumption and
the environmental impact.
Condensation water under
the parked vehicle
Driving on racetracks
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and
options
Reducing fuel consump-
tion
General information
256
5-1. DRIVING TIPS
Supra Owner's Manual
Additional weight increases fuel
consumption.
Attached parts on the vehicle
impair the aerodynamics and
increase the fuel consumption.
Open windows increase air
resistance and therefore lead to
greater fuel consumption.
Tires can affect consumption in
various ways, for instance tire
size may influence consump-
tion.
Check and, if needed, correct
the tire inflation pressure at least
twice a month and before start-
ing on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure
increases rolling resistance and
thus raises fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Do not wait for the engine to
warm-up while the vehicle
remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate
engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of
warming the cold engine up to
operating temperature.
Driving smoothly and proactively
reduces fuel consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration
and braking.
By maintaining a suitable dis-
tance to the vehicle driving
ahead of you.
Driving at low engine speeds
lowers fuel consumption and
reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehi-
cle's gear shift indicator, refer to
page 142.
When approaching a red light,
take your foot off the accelerator
and let the vehicle coast to a
halt.
For going downhill take your foot
off the accelerator and let the
Remove unnecessary
cargo
Remove attached parts fol-
lowing use
Closing the windows
Tires
General information
Check the tire inflation pres-
sure regularly
Drive away without delay
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid high engine speeds
Use coasting conditions
257
5-1. DRIVING TIPS
Supra Owner's Manual
5
DRIVING TIPS
vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted
while coasting.
Switch off the engine during lon-
ger stops, for instance at traffic
lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
The Auto Start/Stop function of
the vehicle automatically
switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and
then restarted rather than leav-
ing the engine running con-
stantly, fuel consumption and
emissions are reduced. Sav-
ings can begin within a few sec-
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is
also determined by other fac-
tors, such as driving style, road
conditions, maintenance or envi-
ronmental factors.
Functions such as seat heating
and the rear window defroster
require a lot of energy and
increase fuel consumption,
especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they
are not needed.
Have the vehicle maintained
regularly to achieve optimal
vehicle efficiency and service
life. Toyota recommends that
maintenance work be performed
by Toyota.
For information on the Mainte-
nance System, refer to page
299.
Switch off the engine
during longer stops
Switching off the engine
Auto Start/Stop function
Switch off any functions
that are not currently
needed
Have maintenance carried
out
258
5-1. DRIVING TIPS
Supra Owner's Manual
259
Supra Owner's Manual
6
6
MOBILITY
MOBILITY
.
6-1. MOBILITY
Refueling..................... 260
Wheels and tires ......... 262
Engine compartment... 288
Operating materials..... 291
Maintenance ............... 299
Replacing components
.................................. 302
Breakdown assistance
.................................. 310
Care ............................ 319
260
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6-1.MOBILITY
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Follow the fuel recommenda-
tion, refer to page 291, prior to
refueling.
When refueling, insert the filler
nozzle completely into the filler
pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump
nozzle during refueling causes:
Premature switching off.
Reduced return of the fuel
vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the
filler nozzle clicks off the first
time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is
closed properly after refueling,
otherwise the emissions warn-
ing light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted
at the gas station.
1 Briefly press the rear edge of
the fuel filler flap.
Refueling
Vehicle features and
options
Follow the following when
refueling
General information
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may
no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Refuel promptly.
NOTICE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive.
Overfilling of the fuel tank can
damage the fuel system. Painted
surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel
can harm the environment. There
is a risk of damage to property.
Avoid overfilling.
Fuel cap
Opening
261
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
2 Turn the fuel cap
counterclockwise.
3 Place the fuel cap in the
bracket attached to the fuel
filler flap.
1 Fit the cap and turn it clock-
wise until you clearly hear a
click.
2 Close the fuel filler flap.
It may be necessary in certain
situations to unlock the fuel filler
flap manually, e.g. with an elec-
trical fault.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by
your Toyota dealer.
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap
can be jammed and crushed
during closing. The cap cannot be
correctly closed. Fuel or fuel
vapors can escape. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Pay attention that the
retaining strap is not jammed or
crushed when closing the cap.
Manually unlocking fuel
filler flap
262
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The tire characteristics and tire
inflation pressure influence the
following:
• The service life of the tires.
• Road safety.
• Driving comfort.
• Fuel consumption.
The tire inflation pressure table,
refer to page 264, contains all
tire inflation pressure specifica-
tions for the specified tire sizes
at the ambient temperature. The
tire inflation pressure values
apply to tire sizes approved by
the manufacturer of the vehicle
for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire infla-
tion pressure, please note the
following:
If the tire's speed code cannot
be found, then the tire inflation
pressure for the corresponding
tire size applies.
• Tire sizes of your vehicle.
• Maximum permitted driving
speed.
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and
options
Tire inflation pressure
General information
Safety information
WARNING
A tire with too little or no tire infla-
tion pressure may heat up signifi-
cantly and sustain damage. This
will have a negative impact on
aspects of handling, such as
steering and braking response.
There is a risk of an accident.
Regularly check the tire inflation
pressure, and correct it as
needed, for instance twice a
month and before a long trip.
Tire inflation pressure
specifications
In the tire inflation pressure
table
263
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
The current tire inflation pres-
sure values and the intended
tire inflation pressure values for
the mounted tires can be dis-
played on the Control Display.
To ensure that they are dis-
played correctly, the tire sizes
must be stored in the system
and must have been set, refer to
page 278, for the mounted tires.
The current tire inflation pres-
sure value is located on each
tire.
The intended tire inflation pres-
sure value is located in the
lower area of the Control Dis-
play.
Tires heat up while driving. The
tire inflation pressure increases
with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent
loss of tire inflation pressure.
The displays of inflation devices
may under-read by up to 0.1
bar/2 psi.
The tire inflation pressure speci-
fications in the tire inflation pres-
sure table only relate to cold
tires or tires at the same tem-
perature as the ambient tem-
perature.
Only check the tire inflation
pressure levels when the tires
are cold, i.e.:
• Driving range of max. 1.25
miles/2 km has not been
exceeded.
• If the vehicle has not moved
again for at least 2 hours after
a trip.
Check the tire inflation pressure
of the emergency wheel in the
cargo area regularly, and correct
it as needed.
1 Determine, refer to page 262,
the intended tire inflation
pressure levels for the
mounted tires.
2 Check the tire inflation pres-
sure in all four tires, using a
pressure gauge, for example.
3 Correct the tire inflation pres-
sure if the current tire infla-
tion pressure value deviates
from the specified value.
4 Check whether all valve caps
are screwed onto the tire
valves.
On the Control Display
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
General information
Checking using tire inflation
pressure specifications in
the tire inflation pressure
table
264
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Vehicle status"
3 "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4 Check whether the current
tire inflation pressure levels
deviate from the intended tire
pressure value.
5 Correct the tire inflation pres-
sure if the current tire infla-
tion pressure value deviates
from the intended value.
With tires that cannot be found
in the tire pressure values on
the Control Display, reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
For speeds of up to 100
mph/160 km/h and for optimum
driving comfort, note the pres-
sure values in the tire inflation
pressure table, refer to page
264, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also
be found on the tire inflation
pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100
mph/160 km/h.
Checking using the tire infla-
tion pressure specifications
on the Control Display
After correcting the tire infla-
tion pressure
Tire inflation pressures up
to 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h
SZ-R models
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 98 H M+S XL Std/RSC 2.2 / 32
255/40 R 18 99 V M+S XL Std 2.2 / 32
265
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
For speeds over 100 mph/160
km/h and for optimum driving
comfort, note the pressure val-
ues in the tire inflation pressure
table, refer to page 266, and
adjust as necessary.
Front: 255/40 ZR 18 95 Y Std
Rear: 275/40 ZR 18 99 Y Std
2.2 / 32
2.2 / 32
Front: 255/35 ZR 19 96 Y XL Std
Rear: 275/35 ZR 19 100 Y XL Std
2.2 / 32
2.2 / 32
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
RZ models
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 98 H M+S XL Std/RSC 2.2 / 32
255/40 R 18 99 V M+S XL Std 2.6 / 38
Front: 255/40 ZR 18 95 Y Std
Rear: 275/40 ZR 18 99 Y Std
2.6 / 38
2.6 / 38
Front: 255/35 ZR 19 96 Y XL Std
Rear: 275/35 ZR 19 100 Y XL Std
2.6 / 38
2.6 / 38
Tire inflation pressures at
max. speeds above 100
mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum
speeds in excess of 100 mph/160
km/h, please observe, and, if nec-
essary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160
km/h from the relevant table on
the following pages. Otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could
occur.
266
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h
SZ-R models
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 98 H M+S XL Std/RSC 2.2 / 32
255/40 R 18 99 V M+S XL Std 2.2 / 32
Front: 255/40 ZR 18 95 Y Std
Rear: 275/40 ZR 18 99 Y Std
2.2 / 32
2.2 / 32
Front: 255/35 ZR 19 96 Y XL Std
Rear: 275/35 ZR 19 100 Y XL Std
2.2 / 32
2.2 / 32
RZ models
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 98 H M+S XL Std/RSC 2.2 / 32
255/40 R 18 99 V M+S XL Std 2.6 / 38
Front: 255/40 ZR 18 95 Y Std
Rear: 275/40 ZR 18 99 Y Std
2.6 / 38
2.6 / 38
Front: 255/35 ZR 19 96 Y XL Std
Rear: 275/35 ZR 19 100 Y XL Std
2.6 / 38
2.6 / 38
Tire identification marks
Tire size
267
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on
ZR tires
Maximum tire load is the maxi-
mum permissible weight for
which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load
on the tire sidewall and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating –
GAWR – on the certification
label on the driver door B-pillar.
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It
must be greater than one-half of
the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs.
rear GAWR and tire loads,
respectively.
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3818
xxxx: manufacturer code for the
tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3818: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the
guidelines of the U.S. Depart-
ment of Transportation.
Regardless of the tire tread,
replace tires at least every 6
years.
You can find the manufacture
date of the tire on the tire's
sidewall.
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction
AA; Temperature A
Treadwear
Maximum tire load
Speed letter
Tire Identification Number
Tire age
Recommendation
Manufacture date
Designation
Manufacture
date
DOT … 3818 38th week, 2018
Uniform Tire Quality Grad-
ing
DOT Quality Grades
268
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to
these grades
The treadwear grade is a com-
parative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1
g, times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from high-
est to lowest, are AA, A, B, and
C.
Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor trac-
tion performance.
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydro-
planing, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
The temperature grades are A,
the highest, B, and C, represent-
ing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability
to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high tempera-
ture can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger vehicle tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades Band A represent
higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Treadwear
Traction
Temperature
269
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
Winter and all-season tires with
better cold weather performance
than summer tires.
Do not drive with a tire tread of
less than 0.12 in/3 mm, other-
wise there is an increased risk
of hydroplaning.
Do not drive with a tire tread of
less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such
tires are less suitable for winter
operation.
Wear indicators are distributed
around the tire's circumference
and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063
inches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indica-
tors are marked on the tire
sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear
Indicator.
Inspect your tires regularly for
damage, foreign objects lodged
in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged
road surfaces, as well as debris,
curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to
wheels, tires and suspension
parts. This is more likely to
occur with low-profile tires,
which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the
road. Be careful to avoid road
hazards and reduce your speed,
especially if your vehicle is
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combi-
nation, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
M+S
Tire tread
Summer tires
Winter tires
Minimum tread depth
Tire damage
General information
270
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
equipped with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or
other vehicle malfunctions:
• Unusual vibrations.
• Unusual tire or running
noises.
• Unusual handling such as a
strong tendency to pull to the
left or right.
Damage can be caused by the
following situations, for instance:
• Driving over curbs.
• Road damage.
• Tire inflation pressure too low.
• Vehicle overloading.
• Incorrect tire storage.
Have mounting and wheel bal-
ancing carried out by your
Toyota dealer.
You can ask your Toyota dealer
about the correct wheel/tire
combination and wheel rim ver-
sions for the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire infla-
tion pressure, which can lead to
loss of vehicle control. There is a
risk of an accident. If tire damage
is suspected while driving, imme-
diately reduce speed and stop.
Have wheels and tires checked.
For this purpose, drive carefully to
the nearest your Toyota dealer.
Have vehicle towed or trans-
ported as needed. Do not repair
damaged tires, but have them
replaced.
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by
driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs
or road damage, at high speed.
Larger wheels have a smaller tire
cross-section. The smaller the tire
cross-section, the higher the risk
of tire damage. There is a danger
of accidents and property dam-
age. If possible, drive around
obstacles, or drive over them
slowly and carefully.
Changing wheels and
tires
Mounting and wheel bal-
ancing
Wheel and tire combina-
tion
General information
271
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
For each tire size, the manufac-
turer of the vehicle recommends
certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a
star on the tire sidewall.
Tire traction is not optimal due to
manufacturing circumstances
when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction poten-
tial after a break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
The manufacturer of your vehi-
cle does not recommend the
use of retreaded tires.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not
suitable for your vehicle can dam-
age parts of the vehicle, for
instance due to contact with the
body due to tolerances despite
the same official size rating.
There is a risk of an accident. The
manufacturer of your vehicle
strongly suggests that you use
wheels and tires that have been
recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer for your vehicle
type.
WARNING
Mounted steel wheels can cause
technical problems, for instance
independent loosening of the lug
bolts, damage to the brake discs.
There is a risk of an accident. Do
not mount steel wheels.
WARNING
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations
will have a negative impact on the
vehicle's handling and on the
function of a variety of systems,
such as the Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem or Vehicle Stability Control
System. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. To maintain good handling
and vehicle response, use only
tires with a single tread configura-
tion from a single manufacturer.
The manufacturer of the vehicle
recommends that you use wheels
and tires that have been recom-
mended by the vehicle manufac-
turer for your vehicle type.
Following tire damage, have the
original wheel/tire combination
remounted on the vehicle as soon
as possible.
Recommended tire brands
New tires
Retreaded tires
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different
tire casing structures. With
advanced age the service life can
be limited. There is a risk of an
accident. The manufacturer of
your vehicle does not recommend
the use of retreaded tires.
272
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
Winter tires are recommended
for operating on winter roads.
Although so-called all-season
M+S tires provide better winter
traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same
level of performance as winter
tires.
If the maximum speed of the
vehicle is higher than the per-
missible speed for the winter
tires, then attach a label show-
ing the permissible maximum
speed in the field of view. The
label is available from your
Toyota dealer.
With winter tires mounted,
observe and do not exceed the
permissible maximum speed.
Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on
the side wall of the tire.
Store wheels and tires in a cool,
dry and dark place.
Always protect tires against all
contact with oil, grease, and sol-
vents.
Do not leave tires in plastic
bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or
tires.
• Park the vehicle as far away
as possible from passing traf-
fic and on solid ground.
• Switch on the hazard warning
system.
• Secure the vehicle against
rolling away by setting the
parking brake.
• Turn the steering wheel until
the front wheels are in the
straight-ahead position and
engage the steering wheel
lock.
• Have all vehicle occupants
get out of the vehicle and
Winter tires
General information
Maximum speed of winter
tires
Rotating wheels between
axles
WARNING
Rotating tires between the axles
on vehicles with different tire sizes
or rim sizes on the front and rear
axles can cause damage to the
tires and the vehicle. There is a
risk of accident. Do not rotate the
tires between the axles on vehi-
cles with different tire sizes or rim
sizes on the front and rear axles.
Storing tires
Tire inflation pressure
Storage
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
273
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a
safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
• If necessary, set up a warning
triangle at an appropriate dis-
tance.
With the Mobility System, minor
tire damage can be sealed tem-
porarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, seal-
ant is pumped into the tires,
which seals the damage from
the inside.
• Follow the instructions on
using the Mobility System
found on the compressor and
sealant container.
• Use of the Mobility System
may be ineffective if the tire
puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
• Contact your Toyota dealer if
the tire cannot be made driv-
able.
• Do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
Only remove foreign objects if
they are visibly protruding
from the tire.
• Pull the speed limit sticker off
the sealant container and
apply it to the steering wheel.
• The use of a sealant can
damage the TPM wheel elec-
tronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked and
replaced at the next opportu-
nity.
• The compressor can be used
to check the tire inflation pres-
sure.
The Mobility System is located in
the right storage compartment of the
cargo area.
• Sealant container, arrow 1.
• Filling hose, arrow 2.
Mobility System
Concept
General information
Overview
Storage
Sealant container
274
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
Observe use-by date on the
sealant container.
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gauge
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure
button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
• Park the vehicle as far away
as possible from passing traf-
fic and on solid ground.
• Switch on the hazard warning
system.
• Secure the vehicle against
rolling away by setting the
parking brake.
• Turn the steering wheel until
the front wheels are in the
straight-ahead position and
engage the steering wheel
lock.
• Have all vehicle occupants
get out of the vehicle and
ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a
safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
• If necessary, set up a warning
triangle at an appropriate dis-
tance.
Compressor
Safety measures
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
WARNING
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or
ventilation is insufficient, harmful
exhaust gases can enter into the
vehicle. The exhaust gases con-
tain pollutants which are colorless
and odorless. In enclosed areas,
exhaust gases can also accumu-
late outside of the vehicle. There
is danger to life. Keep the exhaust
pipe free and ensure sufficient
ventilation.
NOTICE
The compressor can overheat
during extended operation. There
is a risk of damage to property. Do
not run the compressor for more
than 10 minutes.
275
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
1 Shake the sealant container.
2 Pull filling hose completely
out of the cover of the sealant
container. Do not kink the
hose.
3 Slide the sealant container
into the holder on the com-
pressor housing, ensuring
that it engages audibly.
4 Screw the filling hose of the
sealant container onto the
tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
5 With the compressor
switched off, insert the plug
into the power socket inside
the vehicle.
6 With standby state switched
on or the engine running,
switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max.
10 minutes to fill the tire with
sealant and achieve a tire infla-
tion pressure of approx. 2.0 bar.
Filling
276
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
While the tire is being filled with
sealant, the tire inflation pres-
sure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off
the compressor at this point.
1 Switch off the compressor.
2 Read the tire inflation pres-
sure on the tire pressure
gauge.
To continue the trip, a tire infla-
tion pressure of at least 2 bar
must be reached.
1 Unscrew the filling hose of
the sealant container from
the tire valve.
2 Press the red unlocking
device.
3 Remove the sealant con-
tainer from the compressor.
4 Wrap and store the sealant
container in suitable material
to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
1 Pull the connector out of the
power socket inside the vehi-
cle.
2 Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and
back to distribute the sealant
in the tire.
3 Screw the connection hose of
the compressor directly onto
the tire valve stem.
4 Insert the connector into the
power socket inside the vehi-
cle.
5 With standby state switched
on or the engine running,
switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
2 bar cannot be reached, contact
your Toyota dealer.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
Checking and adjusting
the tire inflation pressure
Checking
Removing and stowing the
sealant container
Minimum tire inflation pres-
sure is not reached
277
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire
inflation pressure is reached.
6 Unscrew the connection
hose of the compressor from
the tire valve.
7 Pull the connector out of the
power socket inside the vehi-
cle.
8 Stow the Mobility System in
the vehicle.
1 Unscrew the connection
hose of the compressor from
the tire valve.
2 Pull the connector out of the
power socket inside the vehi-
cle.
3 Stow the Mobility System in
the vehicle.
4 Immediately drive approx. 5
miles/10 km to ensure that
the sealant is evenly distrib-
uted in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50
mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds
less than 12 mph/20 km/h.
1 Stop at a suitable location.
2 Screw the connection hose of
the compressor directly onto
the tire valve stem.
3 Insert the connector into the
power socket inside the vehi-
cle.
4 Correct the tire inflation pres-
sure to at least 2.0 bar.
• Increase tire inflation pres-
sure: with standby state
switched on or the engine
running, switch on the com-
pressor.
• Reduce tire inflation pressure:
press the button on the com-
pressor.
5 Unscrew the connection
hose of the compressor from
the tire valve.
6 Pull the connector out of the
power socket inside the vehi-
cle.
Minimum tire inflation pres-
sure is reached
Adjustment
278
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
7 Stow the Mobility System in
the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum
permissible speed of 50 mph/80
km/h
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM, refer to page 278.
Replace the nonworking tire and
the sealant container of the
Mobility System promptly.
Tire chains cannot be mounted.
Snow tires should be used
instead.
The system monitors tire infla-
tion pressure in the four
mounted tires. The system
warns you if there is a loss of
pressure in one or more tires.
Sensors in the tire valves mea-
sure the tire inflation pressure
and tire temperature.
The system detects the
mounted tires automatically. The
system displays the specified
nominal pressure values on the
Control Display and compares
these values to the actual tire
pressure values.
If tires are being used that are
not specified on the tire inflation
pressure details on the vehicle,
refer to page 248, such as tires
with special approval, the sys-
tem needs to be actively reset.
The system will then take over
the actual tire inflation pressures
as the target pressures.
When operating the system,
also note the additional informa-
tion found in the Tire inflation
pressure, refer to page 248,
chapter.
Continuing the trip
Snow chains
NOTICE
■
Driving with tire chains
Do not fit tire chains. Tire chains
may damage the vehicle body
and suspension, and adversely
affect driving performance.
Selecting tire chains
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM
Concept
General information
279
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
The following conditions must
be met for the system; other-
wise, reliable flagging of a loss
of tire inflation pressure is not
assured:
• After each tire or wheel
change, the system detects
and updates the mounted
tires and displays them after a
short trip on the Control Dis-
play.
Enter the information about the
mounted tires in the tire settings
when the system does not automat-
ically detect the tires.
• For tires with special
approval:
• After a tire or wheel replacement,
a reset was performed with the
correct tire inflation pressure.
• After the tire inflation pressure
was adjusted to a new value, a
reset was performed.
• Wheels with TPM wheel elec-
tronics.
The information about the
mounted tires can be entered in
the tire settings if the system
does not automatically detect
the tires.
The tire sizes of the mounted
tires can be gathered from the
tire inflation pressure details on
the vehicle, refer to page 262, or
directly on the tires.
The tire details do not need to
be re-entered when the tire infla-
tion pressure is corrected.
For summer and winter tires, the
tire details entered last are
stored. After a tire or wheel
replacement, the settings of the
tire sets used last can be
selected.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Vehicle status"
3 "Tire Pressure Monitor"
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "Tire settings"
Safety information
WARNING
The display of the target pres-
sures is not a substitute for the
tire inflation pressure details on
the vehicle. Incorrect entries in
the tire settings can lead to incor-
rect target tire inflation pressure
values. In this case, it cannot be
guaranteed that the notification of
a loss of tire inflation pressure will
be reliable. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property.
Ensure that the tire sizes of the
mounted tires are displayed cor-
rectly and match the details on the
tires and on the vehicle.
Functional requirements
Tire settings
General information
Opening the menu
Changing settings
280
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
2 Selecting tires:
• "Summer tires"
• "Winter tires/all-season tires"
3 "Current:"
4 Select the tire type that is
mounted on the rear axle:
• Tire size, e.g., 245/45 R18 96
Y.
• For tires with special
approval: "Other tire"
5 Select the maximum road
speed that will be used with
the tires.
6 "Confirm settings"
The measurement of the current
tire inflation pressure is started.
The measurement progress is
displayed.
The system status can be dis-
played on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the system
is active.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Vehicle status"
3 "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
The current tire inflation pres-
sure is displayed for each tire.
The current tire inflation pres-
sures may change during driv-
ing operation or depending on
the external temperature.
Depending on the model, the
current tire temperatures are
displayed.
The current tire temperatures
may change while driving or due
to the external temperature.
Tire and system status are indi-
cated by the color of the wheels
and a SMS text message on the
Control Display.
Any existing messages are not
deleted if the displayed target
pressure is not reached after the
tire inflation pressure is cor-
rected.
• The system is active and
bases warnings on the dis-
played target pressures.
• For tires with special
approval: the system is active
and bases warnings on the
tire inflation pressures stored
during the last reset.
Status display
Current status
Current tire inflation pres-
sure
Current tire temperature
Tire conditions
General information
All wheels green
281
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
A flat tire or major drop in the
tire inflation pressure has
occurred in the indicated tires.
It may not be possible to identify
tire inflation pressure losses.
Possible causes:
• Malfunction.
• During tire inflation pressure
measurement, after confirma-
tion of the tire settings.
• For tires with special
approval: the system is being
reset.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My vehicle"
2 "Vehicle status"
3 "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4 "Tire settings"
• When not selecting "Other
tire":
5 "Confirm settings"
6 Drive the vehicle.
• When selecting "Other tire":
7 "Tire settings"
8 Switch on drive-ready state
and do not drive off.
9 Reset tire inflation pressure:
"Perform reset".
10Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in red
and the following is displayed
"Resetting Tire Pressure Moni-
tor…".
After driving faster than 19
mph/30 km/h for a short period,
the set tire inflation pressures
are accepted as the target tire
inflation pressures. The reset is
completed automatically while
driving.
After a successfully completed
reset, the wheels on the Control
Display are shown in green and
the following is displayed: "Tire
Pressure Monitor active. See
label for recommended pres-
sure.".
You may interrupt this trip at any
time. When you continue the
reset resumes automatically.
A low tire inflation pressure may
cause the VSC Vehicle Stability
Control System to be switched
on.
One to four yellow wheels
Gray wheels
Reset the tire inflation
pressure
Messages: for tires with-
out special approval
General information
282
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
■
Message
A symbol with a vehicle mes-
sage appears on the Control
Display.
■
Measure
Check the tire pressure and cor-
rect as needed.
■
Message
In addition, a symbol with a
vehicle message appears on the
Control Display.
■
Measure
1 Reduce the vehicle speed.
Do not exceed a speed of 80
mph/130 km/h.
2 At the next opportunity, for
instance at a gas station,
check the tire inflation pres-
sure in all four tires and cor-
rect if necessary.
■
Message
In addition, a symbol with the
affected tire appears in a vehicle
message on the Control Display.
■
Measure
Reduce your speed and stop
cautiously. Avoid sudden brak-
ing and steering maneuvers.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or
missing tire inflation pressure
impacts handling, such as steer-
ing and braking response. Do not
continue driving if the vehicle is
equipped with normal tires.
If a tire inflation pressure
check is required
Symbol Possible cause
Inflation was not carried
out according to specifi-
cations, e.g., when the
tire has not been suffi-
ciently inflated or in the
case of a natural steady
tire pressure loss.
If the tire inflation pressure
is too low
A yellow warning light is
illuminated in the instru-
ment cluster.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation
pressure loss.
If there is a significant loss
of tire inflation pressure
A yellow warning light is
illuminated in the instru-
ment cluster.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a
major loss in tire infla-
tion pressure.
283
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
A low tire inflation pressure may
cause the VSC Vehicle Stability
Control System to be switched
on.
■
Message
A symbol with a vehicle mes-
sage appears on the Control
Display.
■
Measure
1 Check the tire pressure and
correct as needed.
2 Perform a system reset.
■
Message
In addition, a symbol with a
vehicle message appears on the
Control Display.
Messages: for tires with
special approval
General information
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or
missing tire inflation pressure
impacts handling, such as steer-
ing and braking response. Do not
continue driving if the vehicle is
equipped with normal tires.
If a tire inflation pressure
check is required
Symbol Possible cause
Inflation was not carried
out according to specifi-
cations, e.g., the tire
has not been suffi-
ciently inflated.
The system has
detected a wheel
change, but no reset
was done.
The tire inflation pres-
sure has fallen below
the level of the last
reset.
No reset was per-
formed for the system.
The system issues a
warning based on the
tire inflation pressures
stored during the last
reset.
If the tire inflation pressure
is too low
A yellow warning light is
illuminated in the instru-
ment cluster.
284
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
■
Measure
1 Reduce the vehicle speed.
Do not exceed a speed of 80
mph/130 km/h.
2 At the next opportunity, for
instance at a gas station,
check the tire inflation pres-
sure in all four tires and cor-
rect if necessary.
3 Reset the system.
■
Message
In addition, a symbol with the
affected tire appears in a vehicle
message on the Control Display.
■
Measure
Reduce your speed and stop
cautiously. Avoid sudden brak-
ing and steering maneuvers.
1 Identify the damaged tire.
Check the tire inflation pressure in
all four tires, for instance using the
tire pressure gauge of a flat tire kit.
For tires with special approval: if
the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the TPM may not
have been reset. In this case, per-
form the reset.
If tire damage cannot be found,
contact your Toyota dealer.
2 Repair the flat tire, e.g., with
a flat tire kit or by changing
the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from
the flat tire kit, may damage the
TPM wheel electronics. Have
the electronics replaced at the
next opportunity.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation
pressure loss.
No reset was per-
formed for the system.
The system issues a
warning based on the
tire inflation pressures
stored during the last
reset.
If there is a significant loss
of tire inflation pressure
A yellow warning light is
illuminated in the instru-
ment cluster.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a
major loss in tire infla-
tion pressure.
No reset was per-
formed for the system.
The system issues a
warning based on the
tire inflation pressures
stored during the last
reset.
Actions in the event of a
flat tire
285
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
The tire inflation pressure
depends on the tire's tempera-
ture.
Driving or exposure to the sun
will increase the tire's tempera-
ture, thus increasing the tire
inflation pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is
reduced when the tire tempera-
ture falls again.
These circumstances may
cause a warning when tempera-
tures fall very sharply.
Following a temperature-related
warning, the target pressures
are displayed on the Control
Display again after a short dis-
tance.
The system cannot indicate sud-
den serious tire damage caused
by external circumstances.
Tires with special approval: the
system will not function correctly
if a reset was not performed, for
example a flat tire may be indi-
cated although the tire inflation
pressures are correct.
• A wheel without TPM wheel
electronics, such as an emer-
gency wheel, is mounted:
have the wheels checked, if
needed.
• Malfunction: have the system
checked.
• Interference caused by sys-
tems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after
leaving the area of the inter-
ference, the system automati-
cally becomes active again.
• For tires with special
approval: the system was
unable to complete the reset.
Perform a system reset again.
• Each tire, including the spare
(if provided) should be
checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation
System limits
Temperature
Sudden tire pressure loss
Failure to perform a reset
Malfunction
Message
The yellow warning
light flashes and is then
illuminated continu-
ously. A vehicle mes-
sage is displayed. It
may not be possible to
identify tire pressure
losses.
Measure
Declaration according to
NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
286
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a dif-
ferent size than the size indi-
cated on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.) As an added
safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possi-
ble, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehi-
cle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver's responsibility
to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure tell-
tale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indi-
cate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pres-
sure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the tell-
tale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then
remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from func-
tioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function prop-
erly.
287
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
If a tire is punctured and loses
pressure, it is not necessary to
replace the tire immediately if a
tire repair kit (Mobility System) is
used.
If needed, the tools for changing
wheels are available as acces-
sories from your Toyota dealer.
The wheel lug bolts have a spe-
cial coding. The lug bolts can
only be released with the
adapter which matches the cod-
ing.
The adapter of the lug bolt lock
is in the onboard vehicle tool kit
or in a storage compartment
close to the onboard vehicle tool
kit.
• Lug bolt, arrow 1.
• Adapter, arrow 2.
1 Attach the adapter to the lug
bolt.
2 Unscrew the lug bolt.
3 Remove the adapter after
unscrewing the lug bolt.
1 Attach the adapter to the lug
bolt. If necessary, turn the
adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2 Screw on the wheel stud.
The tightening torque is 140
Nm.
3 Remove the adapter and
stow it after screwing on the
lug bolt.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
Lug bolt lock
Concept
Overview
Unscrewing
Screwing on
288
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and
options
289
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
3 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
4 Oil filler neck
5 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling
6 Coolant reservoir, engine
7 Vehicle identification number
Overview
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the
engine compartment can damage
vehicle components and impair
vehicle functions. There is a risk
of personal and property damage.
The manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends that, in the effort to
avoid such risks, work in the
engine compartment be per-
formed by your Toyota dealer.
290
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
1 Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2 After the lever is released,
pull the lever again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3 Be careful of protruding parts
on the hood.
Energetically close the hood
from approx. 20 in/50 cm.
WARNING
The engine compartment accom-
modates moving components.
Certain components in the engine
compartment can also move with
the vehicle switched off, for
instance the radiator fan. There is
a risk of injury. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep
articles of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for
instance locking hook, on the
inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay
attention to protruding parts and
keep clear of these areas.
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can
open while driving and restrict vis-
ibility. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Stop immediately and
correctly close the hood.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when
opening and closing the hood.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be
jammed when the hood is
opened. There is a risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the
wipers with the wiper blades
mounted are folded down onto the
windshield before opening the
hood.
NOTICE
When the hood is closed, it must
engage on both sides. Pressing
again can damage the hood.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Open the hood again and
then close it energetically. Avoid
pressing again.
Opening
Closing
291
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
The hood must engage on both
sides.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Depending on the region, many
gas stations sell fuel that has
been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is
available in winter,for instance
helps make a cold start easier.
For the best fuel efficiency, the
gasoline should be sulfur-free or
very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the
gas pump as containing metal
Operating materials
Vehicle features and
options
Fuel recommendation
General information
Gasoline
General information
292
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol
content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or
E25, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the follow-
ing quality standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current stan-
dard in each case.
Toyota recommends AKI 91.
Toyota recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this min-
Safety information
WARNING
The use of poor-quality fuels may
result in harmful engine deposits
or damage. Additionally, problems
relating to drivability, starting and
stalling, especially under certain
environmental conditions such as
high ambient temperature and
high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encoun-
tered, we recommend switching
to a high quality gasoline brand
and a higher octane grade - AKI
number - for a few tank fills. To
avoid harmful engine deposits, it
is highly recommended to pur-
chase gasoline from Top Tier
retailers.
Failure to comply with these rec-
ommendations may result in the
need for unscheduled mainte-
nance.
NOTICE
Even small quantities of the
wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives
can damage the fuel system and
engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
converter is permanently dam-
aged. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not refuel or add the
following in the case of gasoline
engines:
• Leaded gasoline.
Do not press the Start/Stop button
after refueling with the wrong fuel.
Contact your Toyota dealer.
• Metallic additives, for instance
manganese or iron.
NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the
fuel system and the engine. There
is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use fuels with a higher per-
centage of ethanol than recom-
mended. Do not refuel with fuels
containing methanol, e.g. M5 to
M100.
NOTICE
Fuel that does not comply with the
minimum quality can compromise
engine function or cause engine
damage. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Do not fill with
fuel that does not comply with the
minimum quality.
Recommended fuel grade
Minimum fuel grade
293
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
imum AKI Rating, the engine
may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external
temperatures. This has no effect
on the engine life.
The engine oil consumption is
dependent on your driving style
and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the
engine oil level after refueling by
taking a detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can
increase in the following situa-
tions, for example:
• Sporty driving style.
• Break-in of the engine.
• Idling of the engine.
• With use of engine oil types
that are classified as not suit-
able.
Different vehicle messages
appear on the Control Display
depending on the engine oil
level.
The electronic oil measurement
has two measuring principles:
• Monitoring.
• Detailed measurement.
When making frequent
short-distance trips or using a
dynamic driving style, for
instance when taking curves
aggressively, regularly perform
a detailed measurement.
■
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored
electronically while driving and
can be shown on the Control
Display.
If the engine oil level is outside
its permissible operating range,
a vehicle message is displayed.
A red indicator light indi-
cates that the engine oil pres-
sure is too low.
Engine oil
General information
Safety information
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low
causes engine damage. There is
a risk of damage to property.
Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage
the engine or the catalytic con-
verter. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. When too much engine
oil is added, have the engine oil
level corrected by your Toyota
dealer.
Electronic oil measure-
ment
General information
Monitoring
294
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
■
Functional requirements
A current measured value is
available after approx. 30 min-
utes of normal driving.
■
Displaying the engine oil
level
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle status"
3 "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
■
System limits
When making frequent
short-distance trips or using a
dynamic driving style, it may not
be possible to calculate a mea-
sured value. In this case, the
measured value for the last, suf-
ficiently long trip is displayed.
■
Concept
The engine oil level is checked
when the vehicle is stationary
and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside
its permissible operating range,
a vehicle message is displayed.
■
General information
During the measurement, the
idle speed is increased some-
what.
■
Functional requirements
• Vehicle is parked in a horizon-
tal position.
• Selector lever in selector lever
position N or P and accelera-
tor pedal not depressed.
• Engine is running and is at
operating temperature.
■
Performing a detailed mea-
surement
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "My Vehicle"
2 "Vehicle status"
3 "Engine oil level"
4 "Measure engine oil level"
5 "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked
and displayed via a scale.
Only add engine oil when the
message is displayed in the
instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the
message shown on the Control
Display.
Only add suitable types of
engine oil, refer to page 295.
Safely park the vehicle and
switch off drive-ready state
before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much
engine oil.
Detailed measurement
Adding engine oil
General information
295
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
The oil filler neck is located in
the engine compartment, refer
to page 289.
1 Open the hood, refer to page
290.
2 Open the lid
counterclockwise.
3 Add engine oil.
4 Close the cap.
The engine oil quality is critical
for the life of the engine.
Only add the types of engine oil
which are listed.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, for instance
oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can
contain harmful ingredients.
There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Follow the instructions
on the containers. Avoid the con-
tact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do
not refill operating materials into
different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low
causes engine damage. There is
a risk of damage to property.
Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage
the engine or the catalytic con-
verter. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. When too much engine
oil is added, have the engine oil
level corrected by your Toyota
dealer.
Overview
Adding engine oil
Engine oil types to add
General information
Safety information
NOTICE
Oil additives can damage the
engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use oil addi-
tives.
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause
malfunctions in the engine or
damage it. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. When selecting
an engine oil, make sure that the
engine oil has the correct oil rat-
ing.
296
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
Add engine oils that meet the
following oil rating standards:
If an engine oil suitable for con-
tinuous use is not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an engine
oil with the following oil rating
can be added:
More information about suitable
oil ratings and viscosity grades
of engine oils can be requested
from your Toyota dealer.
The vehicle manufacturer rec-
ommends that you have your
Toyota dealer change the
engine oil.
Coolant consists of water and
additives.
Not all commercially available
additives are suitable for the
vehicle. Information about suit-
able additives is available from
your Toyota dealer.
Suitable engine oil types
Gasoline engine
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil SN
0W-20 C5 for GR Toyota Supra
Alternative engine oil types
Oil rating
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
Engine oil change
NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in
timely fashion can cause
increased engine wear and thus
engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not
exceed the service data indicated
in the vehicle.
Coolant
General information
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cool-
ing system open, coolant can
escape and lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the
engine cooled down.
297
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
Vehicles with gasoline engine
feature two cooling circuits.
Always check the coolant levels
of both coolant reservoirs and
refill as needed.
The coolant level is indicated
using maximum markings in the
filler neck of the coolant reser-
voir.
Depending on the engine instal-
lation, the coolant reservoir is
located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compart-
ment, refer to page 289.
1 Let the engine cool.
2 Open the hood, refer to page
290.
3 Turn the lid of the coolant
reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow
any excess pressure to dissi-
pate, then open it.
4 Open the coolant reservoir
lid.
5 The coolant level is correct if
it is just below the max. mark
in the filler neck.
6 Close the cap.
1 Let the engine cool.
2 Open the hood, refer to page
290.
3 Turn the lid of the coolant
reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow
any excess pressure to dissi-
pate, then open it.
4 Open the coolant reservoir
lid.
5 If the coolant is low, slowly
add coolant up to the speci-
fied level; do not overfill.
6 Close the cap.
7 Have the cause of the cool-
ant loss eliminated as soon
as possible.
■
Disposal
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incor-
rect additives can damage the
engine. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property.
Do not allow additives to come
into contact with skin, eyes or arti-
cles of clothing. Use suitable addi-
tives only.
Coolant level
General information
Checking the coolant level
Adding
298
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
Comply with the relevant envi-
ronmental protection regulations
when disposing of coolant and
coolant additives.
All washer nozzles are supplied
from one reservoir.
Use a mixture of tap water and
windshield washer concentrate.
If desired, a windshield washer
concentrate containing anti-
freeze can be used.
Recommended minimum fill
quantity:0.2 US gal/1 liter.
The washer fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compart-
ment.
Washer fluid
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can con-
tain harmful substances and are
flammable. There is a risk of fire
and a risk of injury. Follow the
instructions on the containers.
Keep antifreeze away from igni-
tion sources. Do not refill operat-
ing materials into different bottles.
Store operating materials out of
reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid
mixture ratio is regulated by the
U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allow-
able washer fluid dilution ratio lim-
its that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid
container.
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch
fire on contact with hot engine
parts. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Only
add washer fluid when the engine
is cooled down. Next, fully close
the lid of the washer fluid reser-
voir.
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repel-
ling effect on the windows can
lead to damage to the washing
system. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not add sili-
con-containing additives to the
washer fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield
washer concentrates or antifreeze
can damage the washing system.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Do not mix different wind-
shield washer concentrates or
antifreeze. Follow the information
and mixing ratios provided on the
containers.
Overview
299
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
The use of undiluted windshield
washer concentrate or alco-
hol-based antifreeze can lead to
incorrect readings at tempera-
tures below +5°F/-15°C.
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The maintenance system indi-
cates required maintenance
measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road
safety and the operational reli-
ability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and
intervals of the maintenance
system may vary according to
the country version. Replace-
ment work, spare parts, fuels
and lubricants, and wear materi-
als are calculated separately.
Further information is available
from a Toyota dealer.
Malfunction
Maintenance
Vehicle features and
options
Maintenance system
300
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
Sensors and special algorithms
take into account the driving
conditions of the vehicle. CBS
uses these to calculate the need
for maintenance.
The system makes it possible to
adapt the amount of mainte-
nance corresponding to your
user profile.
Information on service require-
ments, refer to page 141, can be
displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
Storage periods during which
the vehicle battery was discon-
nected are not taken into
account.
If this occurs, have a Toyota
dealer update the time-depen-
dent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid
and, if necessary, changing the
engine oil and the microfil-
ter/activated-charcoal filter.
Please consult your "Owner's
Warranty Information Booklet"
or "Owner's Manual Supple-
ment" for additional information
on service requirements.
The manufacturer of your vehi-
cle recommends that mainte-
nance and repair be performed
by a Toyota dealer. Records of
regular maintenance and repair
work should be retained.
Scheduled maintenance should
be performed at specified inter-
vals according to the mainte-
nance schedule.
For details about maintenance
items and schedules, refer to
the "Scheduled Maintenance
Guide" or "Owner's Manual Sup-
plement".
Devices connected to the OBD
socket trigger the alarm system
when the vehicle is locked.
Remove any devices con-
nected at the OBD socket
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
General information
Storage periods
"Owner's Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet" or
"Owner's Manual Supple-
ment"
Scheduled maintenance
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
General information
301
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
before locking the vehicle.
There is an OBD socket on the
driver's side for checking the pri-
mary components in the vehi-
cle's emissions.
Safety information
NOTICE
The socket for Onboard Diagno-
sis is an intricate component
intended to be used in conjunction
with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emis-
sions system. Improper use of the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis, or
contact with the socket for
Onboard Diagnosis for other than
its intended purpose, can cause
vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property
damage. Given the foregoing, the
manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access
to the socket for Onboard Diagno-
sis be limited to your Toyota
dealer or other persons that have
the specialized training and
equipment for purposes of prop-
erly utilizing the socket for
Onboard Diagnosis.
Position
Emissions
• The warning light
lights up:
Emissions are deterio-
rating. Have the vehi-
cle checked as soon
as possible.
• The warning light
flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that
there is excessive mis-
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle
speed and have the
system checked imme-
diately; otherwise, seri-
ous engine misfiring
within a brief period
can seriously damage
emission control com-
ponents, in particular
the catalytic converter.
302
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is
located under a cover on the
right side of the cargo area.
Unlock the cover of the right
side panel, arrow 1, and fold
open, arrow 2.
1 To change the wiper blades,
fold up the wiper arms, refer
to page 124.
2 Lift the wiper all the way off of
the windshield.
Replacing components
Vehicle features and
options
Onboard vehicle tool kit
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage
if the wiper falls onto it without the
wiper blade installed. There is a
risk of damage to property. Hold
the wiper firmly when changing
the wiper blade. Do not fold or
switch on the wiper without a
wiper blade installed.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be
jammed when the hood is
opened. There is a risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the
wipers with the wiper blades
mounted are folded down onto the
windshield before opening the
hood.
Replacing the front wiper
blades
303
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
3 Press the button, arrow 1,
and pull out the wiper blade,
arrow 2.
4 Insert the new wiper blade
and press it on until it you
hear it snap into the holder.
5 Fold down the wipers.
Lights and bulbs make an
essential contribution to vehicle
safety.
All headlights and lights are
made using LED technology.
Some items of equipment use
light-emitting diodes installed
behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are
related to conventional lasers
and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
The manufacturer of the vehicle
recommends that you let your
Toyota dealer perform the work
in case of a malfunction.
Condensation can form on the
inside of the headlight glass in
cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched
on, the condensation evapo-
rates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to
be changed.
If despite driving with the head-
lights switched on, increasing
humidity forms, for instance
water droplets in the light, have
the headlights checked.
The battery is maintenance-free.
Lights and bulbs
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Focused laser light can irritate or
permanently damage the retina of
the eye. There is a risk of injury.
The manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends that the work on the
lighting system including bulb
replacement be performed by
your Toyota dealer.
WARNING
Intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye.
There is a risk of injury. Do not
look directly into the headlights or
other light sources. Do not
remove the LED covers.
Headlight glass
Vehicle battery
General information
304
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
More information regarding the
battery can be requested from
your Toyota dealer.
The manufacturer of your vehi-
cle recommends that you have
your Toyota dealer register the
vehicle battery to the vehicle
after the battery has been
replaced. Once the battery has
been registered again, all com-
fort features will be available
without restriction and any vehi-
cle messages displayed which
relate to comfort features will
disappear.
The installed battery is designed
specifically for this vehicle. If an
inappropriate battery is used,
operation of the Auto Start Stop
function may be restricted in
order to protect the battery.
Also, the battery may deterio-
rate faster than normal and the
engine may not be able to be
restarted. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
Make sure that the battery is
always sufficiently charged to
guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full ser-
vice life.
The battery may need to be
charged in the following cases:
When making frequent
short-distance drives.
If the vehicle is not used for
more than a month.
When replacing the bat-
tery
Safety information
WARNING
Vehicle batteries that are not com-
patible can damage vehicle sys-
tems and impair vehicle functions.
There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only vehicle
batteries that are compatible with
your vehicle type should be
installed in your vehicle. Informa-
tion on compatible vehicle batter-
ies is available at your Toyota
dealer.
Charging the battery
General information
A discharged battery is
indicated by a red indi-
cator light.
305
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
In the vehicle, only charge the
battery via the starting aid termi-
nals, refer to page 315, in the
engine compartment with the
engine off.
After a power loss, some equip-
ment needs to be newly initial-
ized or individual settings
updated, for example:
Memory function: store the
positions again.
Time: update.
Date: update.
Maintain the battery in an
upright position for transport and
storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during
transport.
The fuses are located at differ-
ent places in the vehicle.
The fuses are located in the
car's interior in the front passen-
ger floor area behind a cover.
Loosen fasteners, arrows, and
open cover.
The fuses are located in the
Safety information
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle
battery can work with high volt-
ages and currents, which means
that the 12 volt on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only connect battery char-
gers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the
engine compartment.
Starting aid terminals
Power failure
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries dis-
posed of by your Toyota
dealer or take them to a
collection point.
Fuses
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can
overload electrical lines and com-
ponents. There is a risk of fire.
Never attempt to repair a blown
fuse. Do not replace a nonworking
fuse with a substitute of another
color or amperage rating.
In the car's interior
In the cargo area
306
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
cargo area on the right side
behind a cover.
Unlock the cover of the right
side panel, arrow 1, and fold
open, arrow 2.
Additional fuse boxes are
located in the vehicle. In the
case of a malfunction, contact
your Toyota dealer.
The vehicle manufacturer rec-
ommends that you have your
Toyota dealer replace the fuses.
BDC
Front
Additional fuse boxes
Replacing fuses
Fuse informations
307
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
Rear
308
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
VSC Vehicle Stability
Control System
Parking brake
Air conditioning
Blower motor, Interior
ventilation
Rear window heating
Seat heating
Seat setting
Crash-security module
Switching center column,
Light switch element,
steering Operating panel
Audio
HiFi amplifier, Video mod-
ule TV
Rear-view mirror
Symbol Meaning
309
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
Overhead function cen-
ter, Exterior door handle
electronics
Instrument cluster
Additional battery: Dual
Accumulator System
(DSS)
Fuel pump control elec-
tronics, Natural Vacuum
Leak Detection, Gas gen-
erator for battery safety
terminal, Remote control
receiver
Electric window opener
Heating and air-condi-
tioning system
Vehicle's diagnostic port
(interface)
Interior lights in the boot
Vertical Dynamic platform
Vertical Dynamic platform
Vertical Dynamic platform
Mono Camera (Kafas)
Head Unit
Active Sound Design
Symbol Meaning
USB Hub
Body Domain Controller
Controller (Toyota Supra
Command)
Electric fan (air cooler),
Controlled differential
lock
12 V socket, Cigarette
lighter
Interior lights in the boot
Door lock, Exterior door
handle electronics,
Telematic Communica-
tion Box
Electronic gear box con-
trol
Telematic Communica-
tion Box, Exterior door
handle electronics
Electric fan, Rear Power
distributor
Engine control
Switching center column,
Light switch element,
Body Domain Controller
Control panels centre
console, Interior light in
the glove box, Interior
light, Interior light in the
sunvisor, Exterior mirror,
Selector lever
Symbol Meaning
310
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Telematic Communica-
tion Box, Exterior door
handle electronics pas-
senger side
Switcher block driver's
door, Exterior mirror
Symbol Meaning
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and
options
If a malfunction occurs
while driving
WARNING
If a malfunction occurs while driv-
ing, immediately stop the vehicle
in a safe place.
311
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
WARNING
If a warning light illuminates or
flashes, or a warning message is
displayed, immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place. Do not
open the hood to inspect the
engine, as doing so may lead to
serious injury, such as steam
burns. If a warning message is
displayed, perform the necessary
procedures according to the dis-
played message or explanation in
the owner’s manual.
These warning messages indicate
that a malfunction has occurred in
a system or function of the vehi-
cle. If you continue to drive the
vehicle, the engine may stop sud-
denly, possibly leading to an acci-
dent. Also, even if no warning
lights are illuminated or messages
are displayed, if any abnormal
sounds, smells or vibrations are
detected, or of the engine stops
suddenly, refrain from opening the
hood to inspect the engine and
consult an authorized Toyota
retailer or Toyota authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
WARNING
If you hear a loud noise or feel
something impact the underside
of the vehicle while driving, imme-
diately stop the vehicle in a safe
place.
After stopping the vehicle in a
safe place, check the underside of
the vehicle for any leaking brake
fluid, oil or fuel. If any fluid is leak-
ing, stop driving immediately and
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized Toyota retailer or
Toyota authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Brake and fuel lines run under the
floor of the vehicle. If any of these
lines are damaged, the brakes
may fail or leaking fuel may ignite
and cause a fire.
WARNING
During normal driving, do not turn
off the engine. Turning the engine
off while driving will not cause loss
of steering or braking control, but
the power assist to these systems
will be lost. This will make it more
difficult to steer and brake, so you
should pull over and stop the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
WARNING
While driving, if a tire has been
punctured or has ruptured, firmly
grip the steering wheel, gradually
reduce the vehicle speed and
stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Avoid sudden braking and steer-
ing operations as doing so may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle. Gradually reduce the
vehicle speed and stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place.
312
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
If you have been involved in a
collision, perform the following:
1 Immediately leave the vehi-
cle and move to a safe place
in order to avoid secondary
collisions. Make sure to turn
the engine switch off to help
prevent the vehicle from
catching fire. If the airbags
have deployed (inflated), the
airbag related parts will be
extremely hot. Avoid touching
the parts with your hands or
any part of your body.
2 If someone has been injured,
contact emergency services
and request assistance. If
someone has no obvious
external injuries, but they
may have a head injury, keep
their airway open while mov-
ing them as little as possible.
If there is danger of the vehi-
cle being involved in a sec-
ondary collision, move the
injured person to a safe place
while keeping them as hori-
zontal as possible.
The button is located in the cen-
ter console.
The red light in the button
flashes when the hazard warn-
ing flashers are activated.
WARNING
If you have been involved
in a collision
Hazard warning flashers
313
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
1 Unlock the cover, arrow 1,
and fold open, arrow 2.
2 Remove the warning triangle.
Contact the roadside assis-
tance if assistance is needed in
the event of a breakdown.
In the event of a breakdown,
data on the vehicle's condition is
transmitted to the roadside
assistance.
Roadside assistance can also
be contacted via a vehicle mes-
sage, refer to page 134.
Active Toyota Supra Connect
contract.
Cellular network reception.
Standby state is switched on.
Via Toyota Supra Command:
1 "Toyota Supra Connect"
2 "Toyota Supra Assistance"
3 "Roadside assistance"
A voice connection is established.
In case of an emergency, an
emergency call can be triggered
automatically by the system or
manually.
Only press the SOS button in an
emergency.
The automatic emergency call
establishes a connection with
Warning triangle
Roadside assistance
Concept
General information
Functional requirements
Starting roadside assis-
tance
Emergency call
Automatic emergency call
Concept
General information
314
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
the Toyota Emergency Call Cen-
ter.
For technical reasons, the emer-
gency call cannot be guaran-
teed under unfavorable
conditions.
Active Toyota Supra Connect
contract.
Standby state is switched on.
The automatic emergency call
is functional.
The SIM card integrated in
the vehicle has been acti-
vated.
Under certain conditions, for
instance if the airbags trigger, an
emergency call is automatically
initiated immediately after an
accident of corresponding
severity. Automatic emergency
call is not affected by pressing
the SOS button.
1 Touch the cover.
2 Press and hold the SOS but-
ton until the LED in the area
of the button illuminates
green.
The LED is illuminated green
when an emergency call has
been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the
Control Display, the emergency call
can be aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your
vehicle until the voice connection
has been established.
The LED flashes green when
a connection to the Toyota
Emergency Call Center has
been established.
The Toyota Emergency Call Center
then makes contact with you and
takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond,
the Toyota Emergency Call Center
can take further steps to help you
under certain circumstances.
For this, data is transmitted to the
Toyota Emergency Call Center
which serves to determine the nec-
essary rescue measures. E.g., the
current position of the vehicle, if it
can be established.
Overview
SOS button.
Functional requirements
Automatic triggering
Manual triggering
315
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
Even if you can no longer hear the
Toyota Emergency Call Center
through the loudspeakers, the
Toyota Emergency Call Center may
still be able to hear you.
The Toyota Emergency Call
Center ends the Emergency
call.
If the battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using the
battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use
jumper cables with fully insu-
lated clamp handles.
1 Check whether the battery of
the other vehicle has a volt-
age of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on
the battery.
2 Switch off the engine of the
assisting vehicle.
3 Switch off any electronic sys-
tems/power consumers in
both vehicles.
Before you begin, switch off all
unnecessary electronic sys-
tems/power consumers, such as
the radio, on the assisting and
receiving vehicle.
1 Open the cover of the starting
aid terminal.
2 Attach one terminal clamp of
the positive jumper cable to
the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the correspond-
ing starting aid terminal of the
vehicle providing assistance.
3 Attach the terminal clamp on
the other end of the cable to
the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the correspond-
Jump-starting
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with live components can
lead to an electric shock. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.
WARNING
If the jumper cables are con-
nected in the incorrect order,
sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the
correct order during connection.
NOTICE
In the case of body contact
between the two vehicles, a short
circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure
that no body contact occurs.
Preparation
Connecting the cables
316
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
ing starting aid terminal of the
vehicle to be started.
4 Attach one terminal clamp of
the negative jumper cable to
the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the correspond-
ing engine or body ground of
assisting vehicle.
5 Attach the second terminal
clamp to the negative termi-
nal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or
body ground of the vehicle to
be started.
Never use spray fluids to start
the engine.
1 Start the engine of the assist-
ing vehicle and let it run for
several minutes at an
increased idle speed.
2 Start the engine of the vehicle
that is to be started in the
usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not
successful, wait a few minutes
before making another attempt in
order to allow the discharged bat-
tery to recharge.
3 Let both engines run for sev-
eral minutes.
4 Disconnect the jumper
cables in the reverse order.
Check the battery and recharge,
if needed.
The vehicle is not permitted to
be towed.
Starting the engine
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual
functions can malfunction during
tow-starting/towing with the
Toyota Supra Safety systems acti-
vated. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Switch all Toyota Supra
Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.
Transporting the vehicle
General information
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged
when towing the vehicle with a
single lifted axle. There is a risk of
damage to property. The vehicle
should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTICE
The vehicle can become dam-
aged when lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty.
●
Lift the vehicle using suitable
means.
●
Do not lift or secure the vehicle
by its tow fitting, body parts, or
suspension parts.
317
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
To remove a broken-down vehi-
cle from the danger area, it can
be pushed for a short distance.
Roll or push, refer to page 127,
the vehicle.
The vehicle should only be
transported on a loading plat-
form.
Switch on the hazard warning
system, depending on local reg-
ulations.
If the electrical system has
failed, clearly identify the vehicle
being towed by placing a sign or
a warning triangle in the rear
window.
The tow fittings used should be
on the same side on both vehi-
cles.
Should it prove impossible to
avoid mounting the tow bar at
an offset angle, please follow
the following:
Maneuvering capability is lim-
ited going around corners.
The tow bar will generate lat-
eral forces if it is secured with
an offset.
When starting to tow the vehicle,
make sure that the tow rope is
taut.
Pushing the vehicle
Tow truck
Towing other vehicles
General information
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle
weight of the towing vehicle is
lighter than the vehicle to be
towed, the tow fitting can tear off
or it will not be possible to control
the vehicle's response. There is a
risk of an accident. Make sure
that the gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is heavier than
the vehicle to be towed.
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is
attached incorrectly, damage to
other vehicle parts can occur.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Correctly attach the tow bar
or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
Tow rope
318
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
Use nylon ropes or straps,
which will enable the vehicle to
be towed without jerking.
The screw-in tow fitting should
always be carried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed
in at the front or rear of the vehi-
cle.
The tow fitting is found in the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to
page 302.
Use only the tow fitting pro-
vided with the vehicle and
screw it all the way in.
Use the tow fitting for towing
on paved roads only.
Avoid lateral loading of the
tow fitting, for instance do not
lift the vehicle by the tow fit-
ting.
Press on the mark on the edge
of the cover to push it out.
For covers which have an open-
ing instead of a marking, pull the
cover out by the opening.
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Start the engine by jump-start-
ing, refer to page 315, if possi-
ble.
Have the reasons for the start-
ing difficulties corrected by your
Toyota dealer.
Tow fitting
General information
Safety information
NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as
intended, there may be damage
to the vehicle or to the tow fitting.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Follow the notes on using the
tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fit-
ting
Tow-starting
319
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
Regularly remove foreign
objects such as leaves in the
area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently,
particularly in winter. Intense
soiling and road salt can dam-
age the vehicle.
Maximum temperature: 140
°F/60 °C.
Minimum distance from sen-
sors, cameras, seals: 12 in/30
cm.
Care
Vehicle features and
options
Washing the vehicle
General information
Steam blaster and
high-pressure washer
Safety information
NOTICE
When cleaning with high-pressure
washers, components can be
damaged due to the pressure or
temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Maintain sufficient distance
and do not spray too long continu-
ously. Follow the operating
instructions for the high-pressure
washer.
Distances and temperature
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTICE
Water can penetrate in the wind-
shield area due to high-pressure
washers. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Avoid high-pres-
sure washers.
320
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
■
Safety information
■
General information
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle
must be able to roll freely.
Roll or push the vehicle, see
page 127.
Some vehicle washes do not
permit persons in the vehicle.
The vehicle cannot be locked
from the outside when in selec-
tor lever position N. A signal
sounds when an attempt is
made to lock the vehicle.
Make sure that the remote con-
trol is in the vehicle.
Switch on drive-ready state,
refer to page 42.
Do not rub wet headlights dry
and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirt-
ied, for instance from insects,
with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do
not use an ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle, apply
the brakes briefly to dry them;
otherwise, braking action can be
reduced. The heat generated
during braking dries brake discs
and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues
NOTICE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the
vehicle. There is a risk of damage
to property. Follow the following
instructions:
●
Give preference to cloth vehicle
washes or those that use soft
brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
●
Avoid vehicle washes with
guide rails higher than 4 in/10
cm to avoid damage to the
chassis.
●
Observe the tire width of the
guide rail to avoid damage to
tires and rims.
●
Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid
damage to the exterior mirrors.
●
Deactivate the wiper and, if nec-
essary, rain sensor to avoid
damage to the wiper system.
●
Do not treat the convertible top
with wax. Ensure that a cycle
without wax or a special cycle
for convertibles is available to
avoid damage to the convertible
top.
Driving into a vehicle wash
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is auto-
matically engaged when standby
state is switched off. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle
washes.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Headlights
After washing the vehicle
321
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
on the windows, to minimize
loss of visibility due to smearing
and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Regular care contributes to driv-
ing safety and value retention.
Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution
or natural contaminants, such as
tree resin or pollen can affect
the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor
the frequency and extent of your
vehicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as
spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird
droppings, must be removed
immediately to prevent the finish
from being altered or discolored.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain sub-
stances that are dangerous and
harmful to your health. There is a
risk of injury. When cleaning the
interior, open the doors or win-
dows. Only use products intended
for cleaning vehicles. Follow the
instructions on the container.
Vehicle paint
General information
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly performed work on the
vehicle paint can lead to a failure
or malfunction of the radar sen-
sors and thereby result in a safety
risk. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Have
paintwork or paintwork repairs on
bumpers of vehicles with radar
sensors performed by your Toyota
dealer only.
NOTICE
■
To prevent paint deteriora-
tion and corrosion on the
body and components (alumi-
num wheels etc.)
Observe the following precau-
tions:
●
Wash the vehicle immediately in
the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present
on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings
or bird droppings are present on
the paint surface
• After driving in an area contami-
nated with soot, oily smoke,
mine dust, iron powder or chem-
ical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily
soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and
gasoline are spilled on the paint
surface
●
If the paint is chipped or
scratched, have it repaired
immediately.
322
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
Only use cleaning and care
products suitable for vehicles
with matte finish.
Working from top to bottom,
liberally apply water to the
vehicle body, wheel wells and
underside of the vehicle to
remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using
a sponge or soft cloth, such
as a chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks,
use a neutral detergent and
rinse thoroughly with water.
Wipe away any water.
Never use wax or abrasive
compounds.
Remove dust from the leather
regularly, using a cloth or vac-
uum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and
road grime chafe in pores and
folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degrada-
tion of the leather surface.
To guard against discoloration,
NOTICE
●
To prevent the wheels from cor-
roding, remove any dirt and
store in a place with low humid-
ity when storing the wheels.
Matte finish
NOTICE
■
To prevent paint deteriora-
tion and corrosion on the
body and components (alumi-
num wheels etc.)
Observe the following precau-
tions:
●
Wash the vehicle immediately in
the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present
on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings
or bird droppings are present on
the paint surface
• After driving in an area contami-
nated with soot, oily smoke,
mine dust, iron powder or chem-
ical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily
soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and
gasoline are spilled on the paint
surface
●
If the paint is chipped or
scratched, have it repaired
immediately.
●
To prevent the wheels from cor-
roding, remove any dirt and
store in a place with low humid-
ity when storing the wheels.
●
If anything is spilled on a
painted surface, wipe it off as
soon as possible. If spilled
washer fluid or alkaline fluids
are left as is, the paint in the
affected area may deteriorate,
causing blemishing.
●
Do not wax or apply coating to
the vehicle. Doing so may
cause a change in the body sur-
face's texture or irregularities in
the paint.
Leather care
323
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
such as from clothing, clean
leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more
frequently because soiling on
such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; oth-
erwise, dirt and grease will grad-
ually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Vacuum the upholstery regularly
with a vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for
instance with beverage stains,
use a soft sponge or microfiber
cloth with a suitable interior
cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to
the seams using large sweeping
motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
When cleaning the vehicle, use
only neutral wheel cleaners hav-
ing a pH value from 5 to 9. Do
not use abrasive cleaning
agents or steam jets above 140
°F/60 °C. Follow the manufac-
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline
cleaning agents can destroy the
protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake
disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them. The heat
generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Carefully clean components
such as the radiator grille or
door handles with plenty of
water, possibly with shampoo
added, particularly when they
have been exposed to road salt.
Environmental influences can
cause surface soiling of rubber
parts and a loss of gloss. Use
only water and suitable cleaning
agents for cleaning.
Upholstery material care
General information
Safety information
NOTICE
Open Velcro® fasteners on arti-
cles of clothing can damage the
seat covers. There is a risk of
damage to property. Ensure that
any Velcro® fasteners are closed.
Caring for special compo-
nents
Light-alloy wheels
Chrome surfaces
Rubber components
324
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
Treat especially worn rubber
parts with rubber care agents at
regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any sili-
con-containing vehicle care
products in order to avoid dam-
age or noises.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Dirty belt straps impede the reel-
ing action and thus have a neg-
ative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the installed belt
straps.
Safety belts should only be
allowed to retract if they are dry.
The floor mats can be removed
from the car's interior for clean-
ing.
If the floor carpets are very dirty,
clean with a microfiber cloth and
water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet,
rub back and forth in the direc-
tion of travel only.
To clean sensors and camera
lenses, use a cloth moistened
with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Plastic components
NOTICE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or
solvents, such as lacquer thin-
ners, heavy-duty grease remov-
ers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of
damage to property. Clean with a
microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth
lightly with water.
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy
the safety belt webbing. Missing
protective effect of the safety
belts. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Use only a mild
soapy solution for cleaning the
safety belts.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area
can limit the pedal distance or
block a depressed pedal. There is
a risk of an accident. Stow objects
in the vehicle such that they are
secured and cannot enter into the
driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle
and can be safely attached to the
floor. Do not use loose floor mats
and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is suf-
ficient clearance for the pedals.
Ensure that the floor mats are
securely fastened again after they
were removed, for instance for
cleaning.
Sensor/camera lenses
325
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
6
MOBILITY
Clean with a clean, antistatic
microfiber cloth.
Clean the protective glass of the
Head-up Display, refer to page
150, using a microfiber cloth and
commercially available
dish-washing soap.
When the vehicle is shut down
for longer than three months,
special measures must be
taken. Further information is
available from your Toyota
dealer.
Displays, screens, and pro-
tective glass of the Head-up
Display
NOTICE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or
fluids of any kind can damage the
surface of displays and screens.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Clean with a clean, antistatic
microfiber cloth.
NOTICE
The surface of displays can be
damaged with improper cleaning.
There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Avoid pressure that is too
high and do not use any scratch-
ing materials.
Long-term vehicle storage
326
6-1. MOBILITY
Supra Owner's Manual
327
Supra Owner's Manual
7
7
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
.
7-1. REFERENCE
Technical data ............. 328
Certification ................. 331
328
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
7-1.REFERENCE
This chapter describes all stan-
dard, country-specific and
optional features offered with
the series. It also describes fea-
tures and functions that are not
necessarily available in your
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When
using these functions and sys-
tems, the applicable laws and
regulations must be observed.
The technical data and specifi-
cations in this Owner's Manual
are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can
deviate from this, for instance
due to the selected special
equipment, country version or
country-specific measurement
method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval docu-
ments, on labels on the vehicle
or can be obtained from your
Toyota dealer.
The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equip-
ment or country-specific measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for
instance a roof antenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can devi-
ate, for instance due to the selected special equipment, tires, load
and chassis version.
*1
:SZ-R models
*2
:RZ models
Technical data
Vehicle features and
options
General information
Dimensions
Width with mirrors in/mm 79.8 / 2026
Width without mirrors in/mm 73.0 / 1854
Height in/mm
51.1 / 1299
*1
50.9 / 1294
*2
Length in/mm 172.5 / 4381
Wheelbase in/mm 97.2 / 2470
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 36.1 / 11
329
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
7
REFERENCE
Observe further information on fuel quality, refer to page 291.
See the further information on engine oil grade, see page 295.
Weights
SZ-R models
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3770 / 1710
Load lbs/kg 474 / 215
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1819 / 825
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2006 / 910
RZ models
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4001 / 1815
Load lbs/kg 474 / 215
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1907 / 865
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2116 / 960
Capacities
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 13.7 / 52
Engine oil
Petrol engine
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil SN 0W-20 C5 for GR Toyota Supra
Cooling system
Coolant type
“Antifreeze and Corrosion Inhibitor Frostox
HT-12”
Automatic transmission
Fluid type Automatic Gearbox Oil ATF 3+
330
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
Vehicles without LSD (Limited Slip Differential)
Vehicles with LSD (Limited Slip Differential)
Differential
Oil type and viscosity Hypoid Axle Oil G3
Oil type and viscosity Hypoid Axle Oil G4
Brakes
Fluid type Brake Fluid DOT 4, Low Viscosity
331
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
7
REFERENCE
The following note is for all
radio-based Components of the
vehicle and the vehicle inte-
grated information systems and
communication devices:
The radio-based components of
this vehicle are in accordance
with the basic requirements and
the rest relevant provisions of
the Directive 2014/53 / EU. Fur-
ther information is available
from your Toyota dealer.
Certification
Information
Alarm System
332
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
Body Domain Controller
333
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
7
REFERENCE
Car-Sharing Module Headunit
334
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
Integrated Universal
Remote Control
335
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
7
REFERENCE
LTE-Compensator
Mid Range Radar
336
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
NFC Reader
337
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
7
REFERENCE
Receiver Audio Module Remote Control
338
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
Side Radar Sensor
339
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
7
REFERENCE
Smart Access Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
340
7-1. REFERENCE
Supra Owner's Manual
Transmitter/Receiver Wireless Charging
341
Supra Owner's Manual
Index
.
Alphabetical Index....... 342
342
Alphabetical Index
Supra Owner's Manual
Alphabetical Index
A
A/C button, see Air conditioning
...............................................230
ABS, Antilock Brake System. 195
ACC, see Dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range
...............................................204
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control.....................130
Accessories and parts ...............6
Activated charcoal filter ........233
Active Guard, see Toyota Supra
Safety ....................................172
Adaptive brake assist ............196
Adaptive variable suspension
...............................................227
Additional coolant tank cooling,
Capacity ................................ 329
Additives, engine oil types ....295
Air circulation, see Recircu-
lated-air mode.......................231
Air conditioning......................230
Air distribution, manual .........232
Air flow, automatic air condition-
ing.......................................... 232
Air outlets, see Ventilation ....233
Air pressure, tires ..................262
Airbags ....................................160
Airbags, indicator and warning
light........................................ 162
Alarm system............................92
Alarm, unintentional.................94
All-season tires, see Winter tires
...............................................272
Antilock Brake System, ABS.195
Anti-slip control, see VSC .....196
Anti-theft protection, locking ..80
Anti-theft protection, see Lug
bolt lock ................................ 287
Apple CarPlay, connection to the
vehicle .....................................72
Approved axle load ................329
Approved total weight............329
Assistance when driving off, see
Hill-start assist control.........196
Assistance with breakdown ..312
AUTO program, automatic air
conditioning ..........................231
Auto Start/Stop function ........115
Automatic air conditioning....228
Automatic cruise control with
Stop & Go ..............................204
Automatic Curb Monitor, exte-
rior mirror ..............................106
Automatic deactivation,
front-seat passenger airbags
...............................................170
Automatic headlight control..153
Automatic high-beam.............155
Automatic locking ....................91
Automatic transmission.........125
Automatic transmission, Fluid
...............................................329
Automatic transmission, see
Automatic transmission.......125
Automatic unlocking ................91
Automatic vehicle wash.........319
Autonomous Emergency Brak-
ing ..........................................193
Axle loads, weights ................329
B
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar
support ..................................100
Backrest tilt ...............................99
Backrest, seats .........................97
Backrest, width .......................100
Bar for tow-starting/towing....317
Battery, changing, remote con-
trol of the vehicle....................82
Battery, disposing of ..............305
Battery, vehicle .......................303
343
Supra Owner's Manual
343
Alphabetical Index
Being towed, see Tow-starting
and towing ............................316
Belts, see Safety belts ...........100
Beverage holder, see Cup hold-
ers..........................................244
Blind spot monitor .................189
Bluetooth connection ..............68
Bottle holder, see Cup holders
...............................................244
Brake assist ............................196
Brake assist, adaptive ...........196
Brake discs, breaking in, see
Brake system........................251
Brake lights, see Lights and
bulbs......................................303
Brake pads, breaking in, see
Brake system........................251
Brake system..........................251
Brake, Fluid.............................330
Braking, information .............. 253
Break recommendation, see
Driver attention control .......193
Breakdown assistance ..312, 313
Break-in ...................................250
Brightness, Control Display ....60
Bulb replacement, see Lights
and bulbs ..............................303
Bulbs, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs......................................303
Button, SOS, see Intelligent
emergency call .....................313
Button, Start/Stop................... 115
Buttons on the steering wheel 36
Bypassing, see Jump-starting
...............................................315
C
Cable for tow-starting/towing 317
California Proposition 65 Warn-
ing..............................................6
Calling up mirror adjustment ..91
Calling up seat adjustment......91
Calling up steering wheel adjust-
ment.........................................91
Camera lenses, care...............324
Camera, rearview camera ......220
Camera-based assistance sys-
tems, see Toyota Supra Safety
...............................................172
Camera-based cruise control,
see Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range.....204
Can holder, see Cup holders .244
Car seats, see Transporting chil-
dren safely............................. 111
Car wash..................................319
Car washing ............................319
Care of displays, screens ......325
Care, Head-up Display ...........325
Care, see Washing the vehicle
...............................................319
Care, vehicle ...........................321
Cargo area...............................244
Cargo area, loading, see Stowing
and securing cargo ..............246
Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes
in the cargo area...................246
Cargo, stowing and securing 246
Carpet, care.............................324
CarPlay, connection to the vehi-
cle ............................................72
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust gas system .............251
CBS Condition Based Service
...............................................300
CC, see Cruise control ...........200
Center console..........................38
Central locking system ............85
Central screen, see Control Dis-
play ..........................................46
Changes, technical, see For Your
Own Safety ................................5
Changing parts .......................302
Changing wheels ....................287
344
Alphabetical Index
Supra Owner's Manual
Changing wheels/tires ...........270
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number.............12
Checking the engine oil level
electronically ........................293
Checking the oil level electroni-
cally .......................................293
Child restraint systems, mount-
ing.......................................... 111
Child restraint systems, see
Transporting children safely111
Child seat, mounting.............. 111
Child seats, see Transporting
children safely ...................... 111
Children, seating position ..... 111
Children, transporting safely 111
Chrome surfaces, care ..........323
Chrome-plated surfaces, care323
Cleaning displays, screens ...325
Cleaning, Head-up Display ....325
Climate control .......................228
Combination switch, see Turn
signals...................................121
Combination switch, see
Washer/wiper system...........121
Comfort entry ........................... 86
Comparison of entries, see Entry
comparison.............................44
Compartments in the doors ..243
Compressor ............................274
Condensation water under the
parked vehicle ...................... 255
Condensation, removing from
the windows..........................232
Condition Based Service CBS
...............................................300
Confirmation signal from the
vehicle .....................................91
Connecting electrical devices,
see Sockets ..........................240
Connections, Screen Mirroring73
Control Display......................... 46
Control Display, settings .........58
Control systems, driving stability
...............................................195
Controller ..................................47
Convenient closing with the
remote control ........................80
Convenient opening with the
remote control ........................80
Coolant ....................................296
Coolant level ...........................297
Coolant temperature ..............140
Cooling system.......................296
Cooling, maximum .................230
Corrosion on brake discs ......254
Cosmetic mirror......................240
Cruise control .........................200
Cruise control with distance con-
trol, see Dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range
...............................................204
Cruise control without distance
control, see Cruise control ..200
Cruise control, active with Stop
& Go .......................................204
Cruising range ........................140
Cup holder...............................244
Curtain shield airbag..............160
Customize Settings, see Driver
profiles.....................................64
Customize Settings, see Sport
mode switch..........................131
D
Damage, tires ..........................269
Data memory...............................8
Data protection, settings .........62
Data, see Deleting personal data
in the vehicle...........................63
Data, technical ........................328
Date............................................59
Daytime running lights...........155
Defogging the windows .........232
345
Supra Owner's Manual
345
Alphabetical Index
Defrosting the windows.........232
Deleting personal data.............63
Departure time, parked-car venti-
lation......................................235
Device list, displaying..............74
Devices, managing...................74
Diagnosis connection ............300
Differential oil .........................330
Dimensions .............................328
Dimmable exterior mirrors .... 106
Dimmable interior mirror .......107
Direct dial buttons, see Program-
mable memory buttons..........54
Direction indicator, see Turn sig-
nals ........................................121
Display in the windshield, see
Head-up Display ...................150
Display lighting, see Instrument
lighting ..................................157
Displays ..................................132
Displays and symbols ...............4
Displays, screens...................325
Disposal, coolant ................... 297
Disposal, vehicle battery .......305
Distance control, see Parking
Sensors .................................214
Driver assistance, see Toyota
Supra Safety ......................... 172
Driver attention control..........193
Driver Fatigue Detector..........193
Driver profiles ...........................64
Drive-ready state, idle state, and
standby state ..........................42
Driving Assistant, see Toyota
Supra Safety ......................... 172
Driving comfort ...................... 227
Driving instructions, break-in250
Driving mode, see Sport mode
switch ....................................131
Driving notes, general ...........251
Driving on racetracks ............255
Driving stability control systems
...............................................195
Driving tips..............................251
Drying air, see Air conditioning
...............................................230
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range............204
E
Electronic oil measurement...293
Emergency brake function when
parking, Parking Sensors with
emergency braking function217
Emergency service, see Break-
down assistance...................313
Emergency unlocking, fuel filler
flap .........................................261
Emergency unlocking, transmis-
sion lock ................................129
Energy savings, see Gear shift
indicator ................................142
Engine compartment..............289
Engine compartment, working in
...............................................289
Engine coolant........................296
Engine coolant, Capacity.......329
Engine oil ........................293, 329
Engine oil change...................296
Engine oil filler neck...............294
Engine oil temperature...........140
Engine oil types to add ..........295
Engine oil, adding...................294
Engine start, jump-starting....315
Engine temperature................140
Engine, Auto Start/Stop function
...............................................115
Entry comparison, navigation.44
Equipment, interior.................236
Error displays, see Vehicle mes-
sages .....................................133
Exchanging wheels/tires........270
Exhaust gas system ...............251
346
Alphabetical Index
Supra Owner's Manual
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas sys-
tem.........................................251
Exterior lighting during unlock-
ing............................................ 79
Exterior lighting with the vehicle
locked...................................... 81
Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb
Monitor ..................................106
Exterior mirror, automatic dim-
ming feature..........................106
Exterior mirrors ......................105
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 106
External start ..........................315
External temperature .............140
Eyelet for towing ....................318
Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the
cargo area .............................246
F
Failure message, see Vehicle
messages ..............................133
False alarm, see Avoiding unin-
tentional alarms......................94
Fan, see Air flow.....................232
Fastening safety belts, see
Safety belts ........................... 100
Filler neck for engine oil ........294
Flat tire message, TPM ..........282
Flat tire warning light, TPM ...282
Flat tire, changing wheels .....287
Flat tire, repairing ...................272
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Moni-
tor TPM.................................. 278
Flooding ..................................253
Floor carpet, care ...................324
Floor mats, care .....................324
Fog, removing from the windows
...............................................232
Fold-away position of the wipers
...............................................124
Foot brake ...............................253
For Your Own Safety ..................5
Front airbags...........................160
Front collision mitigation.......174
Front fog lights, see Lights and
bulbs......................................303
Front lights, see Lights and
bulbs......................................303
Front seats ................................97
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation.........170
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator light........................171
Fuel ..........................................291
Fuel cap ...................................260
Fuel filler flap ..........................260
Fuel filler flap, unlocking manu-
ally .........................................261
Fuel gauge...............................138
Fuel quality..............................291
Fuel recommendation ............291
Fuel, tank capacity .................329
Fuses .......................................305
G
Garage door opener, see Inte-
grated Universal Remote Con-
trol..........................................236
Gasoline ..................................291
Gear change, Automatic trans-
mission ..................................125
Gear shift indicator.................142
General driving notes.............251
General settings .......................58
Glare shield, see Sun visor....240
Go function .............................204
Go function, ACC....................204
GPS geolocation, vehicle posi-
tion ...........................................60
H
Handbrake, see Parking brake
...............................................119
347
Supra Owner's Manual
347
Alphabetical Index
Hand-held transmitter, alternat-
ing code ................................238
Hazard warning flashers........312
Head restraints, front.............104
Headlight control, automatic. 153
Headlight courtesy delay feature
...............................................155
Headlight courtesy delay feature,
switching on ...........................82
Headlight flasher .................... 121
Headlight glass.......................303
Headlights, care .....................320
Headlights, see Lights and bulbs
...............................................303
Head-up Display .....................150
Head-up Display, care ............325
Head-up Display, see Memory
function .................................107
Head-up Display, standard view
...............................................150
Heavy cargo, stowing cargo..246
Height, vehicle ........................328
High beams .............................121
High beams/low beams, see
Automatic high-beam ..........155
Hill start assistant, see Hill-start
assist control ........................196
Hills..........................................254
Hill-start assist control ..........196
Hill-start assist control, see VSC
...............................................196
Holder for beverages, see Cup
holders ..................................244
HomeLink, see Integrated Uni-
versal Remote Control.........236
Hood ........................................ 289
Horn...........................................36
Hot exhaust gas system ........251
Humidity in the headlight, see
Headlight glass.....................303
Hydroplaning ..........................253
I
Ice warning, see External tem-
perature .................................140
Icy roads, see External tempera-
ture.........................................140
Identification marks, tires ......266
Identification number, see Vehi-
cle identification number.......12
Idle state, standby state, and
drive-ready state.....................42
Indicator and warning lights, see
Vehicle messages.................133
Individual air distribution.......232
Inflation pressure monitor, see
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM..278
Inflation pressure, tires..........262
Information..................................4
Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM ........................................281
Instrument cluster ..................132
Instrument lighting.................157
Integrated key ...........................84
Integrated Universal Remote
Control...................................236
Intelligent emergency call......313
Intended use ...............................5
Interior equipment ..................236
Interior lights...........................158
Interior lights during unlocking
.................................................79
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked ......................................81
Interior mirror, automatic dim-
ming feature ..........................107
Interior motion sensor .............94
Intersection warning, see Front
collision mitigation...............174
Interval display, see Service
requirements.........................141
348
Alphabetical Index
Supra Owner's Manual
J
Jam protection system, windows
.................................................95
Joystick, Automatic transmis-
sion........................................ 125
Jump-starting .........................315
K
Key, mechanical .......................84
Key, see Remote control.......... 78
Keyless Go, see Comfort entry86
Kickdown, Automatic transmis-
sion........................................ 125
Knee airbag.............................160
L
Label on recommended tires 271
Lane departure warning.........184
Lane threshold, warning........184
Language, setting on the Control
Display ....................................58
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
...............................................246
Launch Control.......................130
Leather care ............................ 322
LEDs, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs......................................303
Length, vehicle .......................328
Letters and numbers, entering50
License plate light, see Lights
and bulbs ..............................303
Light in the exterior mirror, see
Blind spot monitor ............... 189
Light in the exterior mirror, see
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert)
function .................................224
Light replacement, see Lights
and bulbs ..............................303
Light switch ............................152
Light-alloy wheels, care.........323
Light-emitting diodes, replacing,
see Lights and bulbs............303
Lighting ...................................152
Lights.......................................152
Lights and bulbs.....................303
List of all messages .................61
Load .........................................246
Loading....................................244
Location, vehicle position .......60
Lock, lug bolts ........................287
Locking using the remote control
.................................................80
Locking, automatic...................91
Locking, see Opening and Clos-
ing ............................................78
Locking, settings ......................90
Low beams ..............................154
Low beams, automatic, see Auto-
matic high-beam ...................155
Lower back support ...............100
Lug bolt lock ...........................287
Lumbar support ......................100
M
Maintenance............................299
Maintenance requirements, see
Condition Based Service CBS
...............................................300
Maintenance system ..............299
Maintenance, see Service
requirements.........................141
Make-up mirror .......................240
Malfunction displays, see Vehi-
cle messages ........................133
Malfunction, remote control ....82
Manual air distribution ...........232
Manual air flow........................232
Manual brake, see Parking brake
...............................................119
Manual mode, Automatic trans-
mission ..................................125
349
Supra Owner's Manual
349
Alphabetical Index
Manual operation, fuel filler flap
...............................................261
Matte finish .............................322
Maximum cooling ...................230
Maximum speed display, see
Speed Limit Info ...................142
Maximum speed of winter tires
...............................................272
Measurement, units of .............60
Memory function ....................107
Menu, instrument cluster, see
Selection lists .......................144
Menus, operating, see Toyota
Supra Command ....................43
Messages ..................................61
Messages, see Vehicle mes-
sages .....................................133
Microfilter ................................233
Minimum tread depth, tires ...269
Mirror, see Memory function .107
Mobile communication devices
in the vehicle ........................251
Mobile devices, managing.......74
Mobility System......................273
Modifications, technical, see For
Your Own Safety.......................5
Monitor, see Control Display... 46
Mounting of child restraint sys-
tems....................................... 111
Multi-function hook................246
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons ....................................36
N
Neck restraints, front, see Head
restraints ...............................104
Net, cargo area .......................247
Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy
wheels ...................................323
New wheels and tires ............. 270
NORMAL, see Sport mode switch
...............................................131
Nylon rope for tow-starting/tow-
ing ..........................................317
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis .......300
Obstacle marking, rearview cam-
era ..........................................222
Octane rating, see Recom-
mended fuel grade................292
Oil.............................................293
Oil change ...............................296
Oil change interval, see Service
requirements.........................141
Oil filler neck ...........................294
Oil types to add, engine .........295
Oil, adding ...............................294
Onboard Diagnosis OBD .......300
Onboard literature, printed......76
Onboard vehicle tool kit.........302
On-call service, see Breakdown
assistance .............................313
Opening and closing ................78
Operating concept, Toyota Supra
Command................................43
Operating with the Controller..49
Operation via touchscreen ......51
Overheating of engine, see Cool-
ant temperature ....................140
Overwintering, see Long-term
vehicle storage .....................325
Owner's Manual, printed..........76
P
Paint, vehicle...........................321
Panic alarm, see Panic mode ..93
Panic mode ...............................93
Parked-car ventilation ............234
Parking aid, see Parking Sensors
...............................................214
Parking brake..........................119
Parking lights..........................154
350
Alphabetical Index
Supra Owner's Manual
Parking Sensors .....................214
Parking Sensors with emergency
braking function ...................186
Parking Sensors with emergency
braking function, see Emer-
gency brake function ...........217
Parts and accessories ...............6
Passenger's side mirror, tilting,
see Automatic Curb Monitor,
exterior mirror ......................106
Pathway lines, rearview camera
...............................................222
Performance display, see Sport
displays.................................148
Personal data, deleting ............63
Personal profile, see Driver pro-
files .......................................... 64
Plastic parts, care ..................324
Power failure...........................305
Power windows ........................ 95
Pre-Collision System (for pedes-
trians and bicycles)..............179
Pressure monitor, see Tire Pres-
sure Monitor TPM.................278
Pressure, tires ........................262
Printed onboard literature .......76
Profiles, see Driver profiles.....64
Programmable memory buttons,
Toyota Supra Command ........54
Protective function, windows,
see Jam protection system ...95
Push-and-turn reel, see Control-
ler.............................................47
R
Racetrack operation...............255
Radiator fluid ..........................296
Radio-operated remote control,
see Remote control................78
Rain sensor.............................122
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert)
function .................................224
Rear lights, see Lights and bulbs
...............................................303
Rear window defroster...........233
Rearview camera ....................220
Recirculated-air filter, see Micro-
filter/activated-charcoal filter
...............................................233
Recirculated-air mode............231
Recommended fuel grade......292
Recommended tire brands ....271
Refueling .................................260
Remote control of the vehicle,
changing the battery ..............82
Remote control, additional ......82
Remote control, integrated key
.................................................84
Remote control, loss ................82
Remote control, malfunction...82
Remote control, opening/closing
.................................................78
Remote control, universal .....236
Replacing parts.......................302
Replacing wheels/tires...........270
Reporting safety malfunctions14
RES CNCL button, see Cruise
control ...................................200
RES CNCL button, see Dynamic
radar cruise control with
full-speed range....................204
Reserve warning, see Range.140
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM ........................................281
Retreaded tires .......................271
Reversing lights, bulb replace-
ment, see Lights and bulbs .303
Roadside Assistance, see Break-
down assistance...................313
Roadside parking lights.........154
Rolling code hand-held transmit-
ter...........................................238
RON recommended fuel grade
...............................................292
351
Supra Owner's Manual
351
Alphabetical Index
Roof load capacity .................329
Roofliner ...................................39
Rope for tow-starting/towing 317
Rubber components, care .....323
S
Safe braking............................253
Safety belt reminder for driver's
seat and front passenger seat
...............................................104
Safety belts .............................100
Safety belts, care....................324
Safety systems, see Airbags.160
Safety systems, see Toyota
Supra Safety ......................... 172
Saving fuel ..............................255
Screen Mirroring, connection .73
Screen, see Control Display....46
Screwdriver, see Onboard vehi-
cle tool kit .............................302
Sealant, see Mobility System 273
Seat heating ............................109
Seat, see Memory function....107
Seating position for children. 111
Seats, front ...............................97
Securing cargo .......................246
Selection list in instrument clus-
ter...........................................144
Selector lever, Automatic trans-
mission.................................. 125
Sensors, care..........................324
Service and warranty .................7
Service requirements.............141
Service requirements, see Condi-
tion Based Service CBS ......300
SET button, see Cruise control
...............................................200
SET button, see Dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed
range .....................................204
Set speed, see Dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed
range......................................204
Settings on Control Display ....58
Settings, locking/unlocking.....90
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel .....................................125
Side airbag ..............................160
Side protection .......................218
Signaling, horn .........................36
Signals when unlocking, see
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle .....................................91
Sitting safely .............................96
Sizes, see Dimensions ...........328
Smallest turning radius..........328
SMS text message, supplemen-
tary .........................................134
Snow chains............................278
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagno-
sis ..........................................300
Sockets....................................240
SOS button, see Intelligent emer-
gency call ..............................313
Special equipment, see Vehicle
features and options ................5
Speed Limit Assist .................213
Speed limit display, see Speed
Limit Info ...............................142
Speed Limit Info......................142
Sport chassis/suspension, see
Adaptive variable suspension
...............................................227
Sport displays.........................148
Sport mode switch .................131
Sport program, Automatic trans-
mission ..................................125
SPORT, see Sport mode switch
...............................................131
Stability control systems .......195
Standard equipment, see Vehicle
features and options ................5
352
Alphabetical Index
Supra Owner's Manual
Standard view, Head-up Display
...............................................150
Standby state, idle state and
drive-ready state ....................42
Start/Stop button .................... 115
Start/stop, automatic function115
Status control display, tires ..280
Status information, Toyota Supra
Command................................44
Status of Owner's Manual .........5
Status, vehicle ........................149
Steering wheel, adjusting ......107
Steering wheel, buttons...........36
Steering wheel, see Memory
function .................................107
Steptronic Sport transmission,
see Automatic transmission125
Storage compartments, locations
...............................................242
Storage, tires ..........................272
Storing the vehicle .................325
Stowing and securing cargo .246
Straps for cargo, see Lashing
eyes in the cargo area .........246
Summer tires, tread ...............269
Sun visor ................................. 240
Supplementary SMS text mes-
sage .......................................134
Suspension settings, see Sport
mode switch ......................... 131
Switch for driving dynamics, see
Sport mode switch ...............131
Switches, see Cockpit .............36
Symbols and displays ...............4
T
Tail lights, see Lights and bulbs
...............................................303
Technical changes, see For Your
Own Safety................................5
Technical data.........................328
Temperature display, see Exter-
nal temperature.....................140
Temperature, automatic air con-
ditioning ................................229
Temperature, engine oil .........140
Theft alarm system, see Alarm
system .....................................92
Tilt alarm sensor.......................93
Tilt, backrest .............................99
Tilting the passenger's side mir-
ror, see Automatic Curb Moni-
tor, exterior mirror ................106
Time ...........................................59
Tire brands, recommended ...271
Tire damage ............................269
Tire identification marks ........266
Tire inflation pressure............262
Tire pressure...........................262
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM....278
Tire repair kit, see Mobility Sys-
tem .........................................273
Tire sealant, see Mobility System
...............................................273
Tire settings ............................279
Tire tread .................................269
Tires and wheels.....................262
Tires, changing .......................270
Tool ..........................................302
Torque display, see Sport dis-
plays ......................................148
Touchscreen .............................51
Tow bar ....................................317
Tow fitting................................318
Tow rope..................................317
Towing .....................................316
Tow-starting ............................316
Toyota Supra Command ..........43
Toyota Supra Safety ...............172
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor....278
Traction control ......................198
Traction mode.........................198
TRACTION, driving dynamics198
353
Supra Owner's Manual
353
Alphabetical Index
Transmission lock, electronic
unlocking ..............................129
Transmission, see Automatic
transmission .........................125
Transporting children safely . 111
Tread, tires ..............................269
Triple turn signal activation...121
Trunk lid ....................................89
Trunk lid via remote control ....81
Trunk lid, emergency unlocking
.................................................90
Trunk lid, see Trunk lid ............ 89
Trunk, emergency unlocking...90
Turn signal, indicator light ....138
Turn signals, bulb replacement,
see Lights and bulbs ...........303
Turning circle..........................328
Turning radius lines, rearview
camera...................................222
U
Unintentional alarm, avoiding.94
Units of measurement..............60
Universal remote control .......236
Unlock button, Automatic trans-
mission.................................. 125
Unlocking with the remote con-
trol ...........................................79
Unlocking, automatic...............91
Unlocking, see Opening and
Closing ....................................78
Unlocking, settings ..................90
Updates made after the editorial
deadline.....................................5
Upholstery material care .......323
USB connection .......................71
USB interface, position in vehicle
...............................................241
Use, intended..............................5
Used battery, disposing of ....305
V
Vanity mirror ...........................240
Vehicle battery ........................303
Vehicle breakdown, see Break-
down assistance...................312
Vehicle care.............................321
Vehicle care products ............321
Vehicle features and options.....5
Vehicle identification number..12
Vehicle key, see Remote control
.................................................78
Vehicle messages...................133
Vehicle paint............................321
Vehicle position, vehicle location
.................................................60
Vehicle Stability Control VSC 196
Vehicle status..........................149
Vehicle storage .......................325
Vehicle wash ...........................319
Vehicle, break-in .....................250
Vehicle, washing.....................319
Vent, see Ventilation...............233
Ventilation ...............................233
Ventilation, see Parked-car venti-
lation ......................................234
Venting, see Ventilation .........233
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number ....................................12
Voice activation system ...........55
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
System...................................196
W
Warning against cross traffic 224
Warning and indicator lights, see
Vehicle messages.................133
Warning light in the exterior mir-
ror, see Blind spot monitor..189
Warning light in the exterior mir-
ror, see RCTA (Rear cross traf-
fic alert) function ..................224
354
Alphabetical Index
Supra Owner's Manual
Warning messages, see Vehicle
messages ..............................133
Warning triangle ..................... 313
Warranty......................................5
Washer nozzles, windshield.. 124
Washer system ....................... 121
Washing the vehicle...............319
Water on roads .......................253
Water, see Condensation water
under the parked vehicle .....255
Weights ...................................329
Welcome light during unlocking
.................................................79
Welcome lights .......................155
Wheel cleaner, light-alloy wheels
...............................................323
Wheelbase, vehicle ................328
Wheels and tires.....................262
Wheels, changing...................270
Width, vehicle .........................328
Window defroster, rear ..........233
Window, defrosting and defog-
ging........................................ 232
Windows, powered...................95
Windshield washer nozzles...124
Windshield washer system, see
Washer/wiper system...........121
Windshield wiper, see Wiper sys-
tem.........................................121
Winter storage, see Long-term
vehicle storage .....................325
Winter tires..............................272
Winter tires, tread...................269
Wiper blades, replacing .........302
Wiper system ..........................121
Wiper, fold-away position ......124
Wiper, see Washer/wiper system
...............................................121
Wordmatch principle, see Entry
comparison.............................44
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit ...................................302
355
Supra Owner's Manual
355
Alphabetical Index
356
Alphabetical Index
Supra Owner's Manual
